Army Operation Shooting Policy (AOSP) Vol 1

ARMYOPERATIONAL SHOOTING

POLICYVolume 1 — Personal Weapons

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED

Army Code No. 71810

2005

This pamphlet comes into effect on 1 April 2005 when it supersedes ArmyOperational Shooting Policy, Volume 1 — Personal Weapons, 2003, Army CodeNo. 71795, which should then be destroyed.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTEDii

Amdt No Date Amdt No Date Amdt No Date

COPYRIGHTThis work is Crown copyright and the intellectual property rights for this publicationbelong exclusively to the Ministry of Defence (MOD). No material or information con-tained in this publication should be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmit-ted in any form outside MOD establishments except as authorized by both the sponsorand the MOD where appropriate.

SECURITYThis document is issued for the information of such persons who need to know its con-tents in the course of their official duties. Any person finding this document should hand itinto a British Forces unit or to a British police station for its safe return to the MINISTRYOF DEFENCE, D MOD Sy(Pol), LONDON SW1A 2HB, with particulars of how and wherefound. THE UNAUTHORIZED RETENTION OR DESTRUCTION OF THIS DOCUMENTCOULD BE AN OFFENCE UNDER THE OFFICIAL SECRETS ACTS OF 1911–1989.

AUTHORITYThis publication is issued under the overall direction of the CGS. It is an MOD ApprovedCode of Practice (ACOP). Where issues of health and safety are concerned it takes intoaccount the provisions of the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974.

STATUSThe contents provide clear military information concerning the most up to date experi-ence and best practice available for commanders and troops to use in their operationsand training. If you are prosecuted for a breach of health and safety law, and it is provedthat you have not followed the relevant provisions of the ACOP, a court may find youcriminally liable unless you can show that you have complied with the requirements ofhealth and safety legislation since it is a breach of this legislation which renders a per-son criminally liable. Breaches or omissions of the ACOP could result in disciplinaryaction under the provisions of the Army Act.

AMENDMENTS

DISTRIBUTION(See page v)

FOR THE ATTENTION OF ALL SCALE HOLDERSUnits requiring an increase or decrease to their scale should apply to DGD&D who willarrange for a revised distribution. Any request to exceed the scale must be supported bya written justification which is to be referred by DGD&D to HQ Infantry for approval.

RESTRICTED Army Code No. 71810

RESTRICTED 2005

ARMY OPERATIONAL SHOOTINGPOLICY

Volume 1 — Personal Weapons

Prepared under the direction

of the Chief of the General Staff

Ministry of Defence

April 2005

Crown Copyright Reserved

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTEDiv

FOREWORD

Any person wishing to propose amendments to this pamphlet is invited to write toHeadquarters Infantry, Land Warfare Centre, WARMINSTER, BA12 0DJ. Any suchproposals will be given consideration and, if there is a requirement for them, theappropriate amendments will be prepared and published.

This pamphlet comes into effect on 1 April 2005 when it supersedes Infantry Training,Volume I, Army Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 1 — Personal Weapons 2003(Army Code No. 71795) which should then be destroyed.

DISTRIBUTION(Also see notes on page vi)

ArmyHQs, Commands, Divisions, Brigades and Directorates 1 copy each(less HQ Infantry)HQ LAND — LAIT 2 copies

InfantryHQ Infantry 2 copiesRegular/TA Infantry Battalions and HS Battalions 30 copies eachRegular/TA Independent/Detached Infantry Companies 5 copies eachHQ SASC 210 copiesTAG(G) SASC 40 copiesTAG(UK) SASC 40 copiesITDU 5 copiesSAS Regiments (Regular and TA) 30 copies eachOther Arms and Services (Regular and TA)Major Units 10 copies eachMinor Units 3 copies eachTraining Centres/Schools/Training Areas/Training TeamsHQ School of Infantry 2 copies

HQ Infantry Battle School 2 copiesITC Wales 300 copiesITC Warminster 100 copies ITC Catterick 160 copiesJungle Warfare Wing 5 copies

Army Training Regiments/Depot R IRISH 40 copies eachArmy Foundation College 40 copiesRoyal Military Academy Sandhurst 500 copiesRMCS 5 copiesAll UK Training Areas One copy each

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED v

Other Arms Schools/Training Establishments 20 copies eachDistrict Specialist Training Teams 10 copies eachUniversity Officer Training Corps 5 copies eachCadet Training Teams 10 copies eachBATSUB 2 copiesBATUS 10 copiesBATLSK 2 copies

Royal Navy and Royal MarinesRoyal NavyHQs 2 copies eachRoyal Naval Air Stations 2 copies eachHer Majesty’s Ships 2 copies eachFleet Protection Group 7 copiesHMS Raleigh 5 copiesRoyal MarinesHQ DRM Portsmouth 3 copiesHQ 3 Commando Bde 2 copiesCommandos Royal Marine 50 copies eachIndependent Companies 5 copies eachCTC RM 200 copiesSBS 5 copiesRMR 2 copies each

RAF and RAF RegimentRAFHQs 2 copies eachRAF Cranwell 10 copiesAll SPFS 5 copies eachJoint Nuclear Biological and Chemical Regiment 2 copiesRAF RegimentRAF Honington 150 copies eachRegular/Auxillary Squadrons 2 copies eachFFHQ 2 copiesWg Cdr GD Regt (HQSTC) One copyWg Cdr C&D Regt (HQSTC) One copy

Notes:1. The previous system of A to F scaling is being phased out for GSTPs as new orrevised publications are issued. Units will in future receive a specific initial entitlementas decided by the sponsor.

2. Requests for additional copies must be fully justified and are to be made toDGD&D, Publications in the first instance. Requests will fall into one of three cate-gories and are to be specified:

a. Replacement Issue. To bring units back up to entitlement as a result ofloss or damage.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTEDvi

b. Supplementary Issue. This applies when a unit’s role or circumstancechanges necessitating an increase to the original entitlement.

c. New Issue. This is where a unit has not previously been scaled for a par-ticular publication.

3. Units are reminded that all publications are accountable documents and theirissue and receipt should be the responsibility of a nominated officer or SNCO.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED vii

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTEDviii

CONTENTS

Page

Foreword and Distribution ......................................................................... vContents .................................................................................................... ixIllustrations ................................................................................................ xReferences and Associated Publications ................................................. xiIntroduction ............................................................................................... xiii

Chapter 1

Army Operational Shooting Policy and its Implementation(Personal Weapons) ................................................................................. 1-1

Chapter 2

Management of Shooting Training (Personal Weapons) .......................... 2-1

Chapter 3

The Rifle .................................................................................................... 3-1

Chapter 4

The Light Support Weapon (LSW) ........................................................... 4-1

Chapter 5

The Light Machine Gun (LMG) ................................................................. 5-1

Chapter 6

The Pistol .................................................................................................. 6-1

Chapter 7

Reserved

Chapter 8

Reserved

Chapter 9

Reserved

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED ix

Chapter 10

Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training ................................................. 10-1

Chapter 11

Live Firing Tactical Training ...................................................................... 11-1

Chapter 12

Ammunition Scales ................................................................................... 12-1

ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure No. Page

1 Fire Team Assessment (CI) Score Sheet ................................. 10-842 Fire Team Assessment (Other Arms and Services) Score

Sheet ......................................................................................... 10-100

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTEDx

REFERENCES AND ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS

For the latest edition and/or amendments of each publication see ‘Catalogue of ArmyPublications’ Parts 1 and 2, Army Code No. 12123.

References Code No. Title

A 71751 Infantry Training Volume IV, Ranges, Pamphlet No. 21, Regulations for the Planning Conduct andSupervision of Firing and Training with Infantry Weapon Systems and Pyrotechnics 2001.

Associated Publications

71029 Infantry Training Volume II, Skill at Arms(Personal Weapons), Pamphlet No. 10, PistolAutomatic 9 mm L9A1.

71062 Infantry Training Volume IV, Ranges, PamphletNo. 20, Competition Shooting.

71374 Infantry Training Volume II, Skill at Arms(Personal Weapons), Pamphlet No. 6, The 5.56mm Rifle and Light Support Weapon andAssociated Equipments.

71807 Infantry Training Volume II, Skill at Arms(Personal Weapons), Pamphlet No. 5, The SA80A2 (5.56 mm) System (Rifle, Light SupportWeapon and Carbine) and AssociatedEquipment.

71643 Army Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 2,Individual Weapons.

71789 Army Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 3,Support Weapons.

71811 Infantry Training Volume II, Skill at Arms(Personal Weapons), Pamphlet No. 8, LightMachine Gun.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED xi

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTEDxii

INTRODUCTION

ARMY OPERATIONAL SHOOTING POLICY —STRUCTURE OF PUBLICATIONS

Army Operational Shooting Policy (AOSP) was originally published in onepamphlet issued in 1996. It dealt with Personal Weapons only (Rifle, LSWand Pistol). This was refined and was superseded by a new Volume 1 2003edition. This has been further revised and expanded and is superseded bythe April 2005 edition, Army Code No. 71810. Two further volumes wereproduced. Each volume is self contained. These volumes are:

a. Army Operational Shooting PolicyVolume 1 — Personal WeaponsArmy Code No. 71810

b. Army Operational Shooting PolicyVolume 2 — Individual WeaponsArmy Code No. 71643

c. Army Operational Shooting PolicyVolume 3 — Support WeaponsArmy Code No. 71789

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED xiii

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTEDxiv

Chapter 1

ARMY OPERATIONAL SHOOTING POLICY AND ITSIMPLEMENTATION

(PERSONAL WEAPONS)

Background

0101. The ability to shoot effectively onoperations is a fundamental All Arms skill,which depends on training to achieve highstandards in weapon handling and individ-ual marksmanship in realistic battle shoot-ing conditions.

0102. There is a need for a mandatoryday and night shooting progression whichemphasises movement and realistic firepositions as opposed to static prone shoot-ing. There is a clear need to ensure highindividual marksmanship standards as thekeystone for combined fire effectiveness.

0103. A new approach to the training andtesting of weapon handling and shootingwas introduced in the first version of theArmy Operational Shooting Policy (AOSP)— not only to meet operational shootingrequirements; but in doing so to integratesmall arms simulation and technology available through Small Arms Trainer (SAT)and Automatic Marking System (AMS).

Army Shooting Policy

0104. Army Shooting Policy Paper (ASPP). Army small arms shooting policywas endorsed by the Executive Committee of the Army Board (ECAB) in the ASPP.This paper addressed both the needs of operational small arms shooting and com-petition shooting. Whilst competition shooting has also become more relevant tooperational requirements, it is not the subject of this volume and is covered in sepa-rate directives and instructions.

0105. Shooting Requirements. In establishing operational shooting policy theASPP set out two key principles:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 1-1

CONTENTS

BACKGROUND 1-1

ARMY SHOOTING POLICY 1-1

SCOPE OF ARMY OPERATIONAL SHOOTINGVOLUME I 1-2

OPERATIONAL SHOOTINGREQUIREMENTS (OSR) 1-2

OPERATIONAL MARKSMANSHIPSTANDARDS (OMS) 1-3

SIMULATION AND TECHNOLOGY 1-4

SYSTEM FOR TRAINING THE BATTLE SHOT 1-5

PROGRESSION OF SHOOTING TRAININGAND TESTING 1-8

EVALUATION 1-9

EXERCISING TROOPS 1-10

PROGRESSION OF TRAINING TABLE 1-10

a. All shooting practices and standards should be directly related to the oper-ational requirement for each Arm or Service.

b. There should be a distinction between the common standard of shootingrequired for all trained soldiers and that required of trained (combat) infantry-men. (Definition: An Infantry officer who has completed PlatoonCommanders Battle Course (PCBC); an Infantry soldier who has completedInfantry Phase 2 Training (Combat Infantryman’s Course from Jan 93)).

0106. Sponsorship. The Army Operational Shooting Policy (AOSP) is spon-sored by D Inf in his role as Inspector of Infantry and as special-to-arm adviser toother Directorates, the chain of command and HQ LAND.

Scope of Army Operational Shooting Volume I

0107. Army Operational Shooting contains the battle shooting concept which is tobe understood and executed in full by all Arms and Services in order to ensure effec-tive operational shooting using personal weapons.

0108. The concept is based on Operational Shooting Requirements (OSR) and theestablishment of Operational Marksmanship Standards (OMS) for Infantry and OtherArms and Services. Both OSR and OMS have been incorporated into the progres-sion for Training the Battle Shot.

0109. The progression for operational shooting training and testing is a package. Itcontains live firing (LF) lessons, weapon handling tests (WHT) and lays down annu-al shooting tests known generically as Annual Weapon Assessments (AWA). The useof SAT and AMS are integrated throughout the package where appropriate. The per-sonal weapon LF lessons are contained in the relevant weapon chapter. Ammunitionallocations to complete LF lessons and AWAs are contained in the chapter onAmmunition Scales.

0110. Army Operational Shooting Volume I, therefore, is a self-contained documentmeeting all the requirements of the Army Operational Shooting Policy regarding per-sonal weapons.

Operational Shooting Requirements

0111. Two distinct OSR have been set out — one for the Infantry and the other forOther Arms and Services:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED1-2

Infantry. The Infantry soldier must be able to react quickly and tofire accurately to kill or suppress an enemy to the limits of the bat-tle range of his personal weapon, or at close quarters, from differ-ent static positions, on the move and from cover.

Four-man fire teams must be able to kill or suppress an enemy indefence and in offensive operations at battle ranges to 600 metres.

0112. The conditions of these OSR raise several issues within the context of theshooting package. Foremost of these is the re-definition of personal and alternatepersonal weapon marksmanship standards.

Operational Marksmanship Standards

0113. OMS have been determined for both Infantry and Other Arms and Services,and will be evaluated in AWAs, specifically the Annual Personal Weapon Tests(APWT) and Alternate Personal Weapon Assessments (APWA).

0114. The Personal Weapon Concept is discussed in Chapter 2. In summary OMShave been set for personal and alternate personal weapons:

a. Rifle L85A1/A2 (both SUSAT and Iron Sight) issued to all Arms andServices as a personal weapon. The L22A1Carbine is categorised as a Rifleand issued to RAC Tank Crew as a personal weapon.

b. Light Support Weapon L86A1/A2 (LSW) issued principally to Infantrymen,but also to Other Arms and Services designated LSW marksmen, as a person-al weapon.

c. Light Machine Gun (LMG) issued to Infantrymen designated gunners as apersonal weapon and to Infantry riflemen and LSW marksmen in the Fire Teamas an alternate personal weapon.

d. Pistol issued to all Arms and Services either as a personal or alternate per-sonal weapon.

0115. The detail of all AWAs is contained in the specific personal weapon chapter.In outline the OMS for personal and alternate personal weapons are:

a. Rifle.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 1-3

Other Arms and Services. The non-Infantry soldier must be ableto fire accurately to kill or suppress an enemy as an individual or asa member of a four-man fire team, primarily in defence, out to 300metres.

Ser AWA –Range

RifleAPWT(CI)

RifleAPWA(CI)

RifleAPWT(TS)

(IronSights)

4

75% Hits

RifleAPWT(TS)(SUSAT)

RifleAPWA(TS)

(IronSights)

RifleAPWA(TS)(SUSAT)

1

2

3

100 m

200 m

300 m

400 m

75% Hits 60% Hits 70% Hits 60% Hits 70% Hits

75% Hits 50% Hits 60% Hits 75% Hits 50% Hits 60% Hits

60% Hits 40% Hits 33% Hits 33% Hits 33% Hits 33% Hits

33% Hits 33% Hits N/A N/A N/A N/A

b. LSW.

c. LMG.

d. Pistol.

0116. The attainment of these OMS within the battle shooting context of the OMRdepends on the full use of Simulation and Technology and has resulted in a revisedsystem for Training the Battle Shot.

Simulation and Technology

0117. The integration of small arms simulation equipment — SAT or the DismountedClose Combat Trainer (DCCT) — and the use of technology — AMS and ElectronicAutomatic Sequence Initiator (EASI) — is fundamental to training the battle shot. SATor DCCT will be programmed to reproduce almost every LF lesson for Rifle and LSW.It provides the vehicle for accessible and cost-effective remedial, refresher and pro-gressive shooting training and gives soldiers the opportunity to practise skills before

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED1-4

Ser AWA –Range

LSWAPWT(CI)

LSWAPWA(CI)

LSWAPWT

(OA&Svcs)

LSWAPWA

(OA&Svcs)

4

60% Hits

5

1

2

3

100 m

200 m

300 m

400 m

500 m

70% Hits 70% Hits 70% Hits

70% Hits 60% Hits 70% Hits 50% Hits

70% Hits 50% Hits 60% Hits 50% Hits

70% Hits 50% Hits 50% Hits N/A

70% Hits N/A N/A N/A

6 600 m 70% Hits N/A N/A N/A

Ser AWA –Range

PistolAPWT

PistolAPWA

1

2

3

15 m

20 m

25 m

80% Hits 65% Hits

70% Hits 50% Hits

50% Hits 40% Hits

Ser AWA –Range

LMGAPWT (CI)

LMGAPWA (CI)

1

2

3

200 m

300 m

400 m

70% Hits 50% Hits

70% Hits 50% Hits

70% Hits 50% Hits

firing live. Furthermore, certain Rifle and LSW LF lessons are SAT or DCCT only. It isessential, therefore, that all units have access to these systems and ensure person-nel are trained in its use so it can be utilised to maximum effect.

0118. AMS allows Grouping, Zeroing and Elementary Application of Fire shoots tobe conducted on Electric Target Ranges (ETR) and Converted Gallery Ranges(CGR) without using butt markers or screen targets. During Advanced Application ofFire shoots it will also indicate to the firer where shots are hitting or missing the tar-get. Apart from the obvious advantages for coaching, the use of ranges fitted withAMS can save considerable time.

0119. An EASI system is fitted to almost all ETRs and CGRs. It provides the capa-bility to programme all shoot conditions to ensure the electronic initiation of target andrange sequences. Preprogrammed chips are available from the Range Warden.

System for Training the Battle Shot

0120. Concept. The current System for Training the Battle Shot is a progressivepractical training and testing LF concept — but it differs in philosophy and detail. Ithas application from recruit training involving Live Firing Marksmanship Training(LFMT) through Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training (TLFTT), onwards to unitlevel Live Firing Tactical Training (LFTT). It addresses the specific directives, con-straints and evaluation requirements laid down in the ASPP. The System is to be wellunderstood by all Arms and Services in order to ensure effective operational shoot-ing within the Army. In summary the new System has the following 5 Stages:

0121. Where to Find the Information. The structure of this pamphlet ensureseasy access to all the relevant information and its application to Infantry and OtherArms and Services for each Stage of Training the Battle Shot. The other chapters andtheir contents are:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 1-5

LFMT Stage 1 Preliminary Grouping and ZeroingLFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of FireLFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon AssessmentTLFTT Stage 4 Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training LFTT Stage 5 Live Firing Tactical Training

Chapter 2 — Management of Shooting Training

Chapter 3 — The RifleAll Rifle LFMT Shoots including the AWAs and WHT

Chapter 4 — The LSWAll LSW LFMT Shoots including the AWAs and WHT

realist

Sticky Note

LFMT stage 1-3, TLFTT and LFTT.

realist

Highlight

0122. Concept in Detail. The concept of Training the Battle Shot is founded oninter-dependence. Stages are mutually reinforcing. A soldier should not move on toanother stage until he has attained the standards required.

0123. Stage 1 — Preliminary Grouping and Zeroing. Soldiers are to be trainedto group consistently to the required standard from all firing positions. Training willprogress from SAT or DCCT — where basic weapon lessons will be confirmed andfaults in applying marksmanship principles corrected — to full bore shoots at 25metres and then up to 100 metres. No soldier is to zero his personal weapon until hecan achieve the required grouping standard. A soldier’s success in applying fire isdirectly related to his ability to group consistently. He is unlikely to pass the AnnualWeapon Assessments in Stage 3 until he can do so.

0124. Stage 2 — Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire. The soldieris then to progress to shooting at longer ranges in conditions relevant to OSR andfrom all firing positions required in the OMS. He will be taught how to overcome theeffects of wind and extremes of light. He will also be introduced to different targettypes and be trained in snap and rapid shooting, and in quickly adopting fire positions.This stage progresses from firing at targets superimposed on 1.22 metre witnessscreens or on AMS monitors, to silhouette targets.

0125. Stage 3 — Annual Weapon Assessments. The OMS for all soldiers areto be tested in Annual Weapon Assessments. There are two elements to these annu-al assessments:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED1-6

Chapter 5 — The LMGAll LMG LFMT Shoots including the AWAs and WHT

Chapter 6 — The PistolAll Pistol LFMT Shoots including the AWAs and WHT

Chapter 10 — Transition to Live Firing Tactical TrainingFiring at Moving Targets — All Arms and ServicesFiring in NBC Conditions — All Arms and ServicesAutomatic Fire — Infantry OnlyFiring at the LNV — All Arms and ServicesFiring with CWS — Infantry OnlyFiring with HMNVS and LA — Infantry OnlyFire Team Assessments — All Arms and Services

Chapter 11 — Live Firing Tactical TrainingOutline IFFC Objectives

Chapter 12 — Ammunition Scales

realist

Highlight

realist

Highlight

realist

Highlight

a. Weapon Handling Tests (WHT) for both personal and alternate personalweapons. All officers and soldiers are to complete their personal weapon WHTstwice a year in line with Individual Training Directives Army (ITD(A))1.

b. APWTs and APWAs. All officers and soldiers are to fire a personalweapon APWT and the Infantry are also to fire an APWA. If Other Arms andServices personnel wish to and can fire an APWA then guidance to do so isprovided in the relevant weapon chapter. The AWAs for Infantry and OtherArms and Services are:

0126. In APWTs/APWAs firers will engage a variety of targets from different firingpositions out to the battle range of their weapon. These tests ensure the foundationsfor transition to and execution of LFTT. Annual Weapon Assessments are mandato-ry for all ranks up to and including Lieutenant Colonel and will form part of a unitOPEVAL return. Officers above the rank of Lieutenant Colonel should seek to com-plete Annual Weapon Assessments wherever possible.

0127. Stage 4 — Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training. In TLFTT opera-tional shooting skills are developed beyond the basic standards achieved in LFMT.TLFTT applies most directly to the Infantry — although Other Arms and Services willcomplete certain shoots — and comprises Firing at Moving Targets, Firing in NBCConditions, Automatic Fire, Firing with CWS, Firing at the LNV, Firing with HMNVS andLA and Fire Team Assessments. The Fire Team Assessments will combine battle fit-ness with marksmanship to practise team fire effectiveness. They will allow comman-ders to identify strengths and weaknesses of both individuals and fire teams.

0128. Stage 5 — Live Firing Tactical Training. LFTT is the culmination of train-ing the battle shot. It will bring together and practise all OMS within realistic opera-tional shooting conditions set out in the OSR. For the Infantry the annual IFFC is thevehicle for completing Stage 5 and is mandatory. The scope and conduct of an IFFCprogramme will be directed by the Chain of Command and influenced by resource

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 1-7

Rifle APWT Combat Infantrymen APWT(CI)Rifle APWT Other Arms and Services

Trained Soldiers APWT(TS)LSW APWT Combat Infantrymen APWT(CI)LSW APWT Other Arms and Services

Nominated Personnel APWT(OA&SVCS)LMG APWT Combat Infantrymen APWT(CI)Pistol APWT All Arms and Services APWT

Rifle APWA Combat Infantrymen APWA(CI)LSW APWA Combat Infantrymen APWA(CI)LSW APWA Other Arms and Services APWA(OA&SVCS)LMG APWA Combat Infantrymen APWA(CI)Pistol APWA Combat Infantrymen APWA(CI)

realist

Sticky Note

Annual Weapon Assessment

realist

Sticky Note

Annual personal weapons Assessment.

realist

Sticky Note

Annual personal Weapons Test

realist

Highlight

realist

Highlight

factors. COs are to conduct a progressive LFTT package starting with low level exer-cises and culminating in company level offensive live firing exercises by day and pla-toon level live firing by night.

Progression of Shooting Training and Testing

0129. Detailed Application of LFMT.

a. Other Arms and Services Phase 1 Recruit Training. At the Army TrainingRegiment (ATR) and Army Foundation College (AFC) all LF lessons in LFMTStages 1 and 2 Rifle are to be fired. These progressive shoots prepare therecruit for his LFMT Stage 3 APWT(TS). Other Arms and Services TA recruitsare to achieve the same standards as regular recruits.

b. The Combat Infantrymans Course (CIC). Regular and TA Infantry recruitsoldiers are to complete the Combat Infantryman Course (CIC). During this theInfantry recruit soldier is to achieve a higher standard of marksmanship with theRifle by completing additional designated LF lessons in LFMT Stages 1 and 2Rifle and then passing the LFMT Stage 3 APWT(CI). He is also to completedesignated LF lessons in LFMT Stages 1 and 2 LSW to prepare him for LSWAPWA(CI). Infantry TA recruits are to achieve the same standards as regularrecruits.

c. Combat Infantrymen — Regular and TA Units. In regular and TA units,combat infantrymen, depending on their personal and alternate personalweapons, are to maintain and test their shooting standards by firing designat-ed LF lessons from LFMT Stages 1 and 2 Rifle/LSW/LMG/Pistol, and then firethe LFMT Stage 3 Rifle/LSW/LMG APWT(CI) or Pistol APWT as appropriate.For their alternate weapon they are to fire Rifle/LMG/Pistol APWA(CI).

d. Other Arms and Services Personnel — Regular and TA Units. In regularand TA units, Other Arms and Services personnel are to maintain and test theirshooting standards by firing designated LF lessons from LFMT Stages 1 and 2Rifle and then fire the APWT(TS). Those soldiers appointed as LSW gunnersare to fire designated LF lessons from LFMT Stages 1 and 2 LSW and com-plete the LSW APWT(OA&Svcs). Those soldiers allocated a Pistol as their per-sonal weapon are to fire designated Pistol LF lessons and then complete theLFMT Stage 3 Pistol APWT.

e. Exceptions. For Other Arms and Services personnel there are twoexceptions to the above conditions:

(1) RLC Soldier Pioneer Support. RLC soldiers whose employmentclassification is Soldier Pioneer Support are to be regarded as combatinfantrymen for the purposes of shooting training and testing. Once intheir units, having completed the CIC, they are to fire the same designat-ed LF lessons from LFMT Stages 1 and 2 Rifle and/or LSW and completethe LFMT Stage 3 Rifle/LSW APWT(CI).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED1-8

realist

Highlight

(2) Soldiers Issued with Rifle (SUSAT) as Personal Weapons. Thosesoldiers other than RLC Soldiers Pioneer Support whose personalweapon is a Rifle with SUSAT, once in their units, will fire the designatedLF lessons from LFMT Stages 1 and 2 for Other Arms and Services andcomplete the LFMT Stage 3 Rifle APWT(TS), but are to achieve highershooting standards. These standards are specified in the relevant LFlessons and APWT(TS).

0130. Detailed Application of TLFTT and LFTT.

a. Other Arms and Services Phase 1 Recruit Training. The TLFTT shootscarried out at ATRs will be Firing at Moving Targets, Firing in NBC Conditionsand Firing at the LNV.

b. CIC. During the CIC all TLFTT shoots will be completed except Firingwith CWS and Firing with HMNVS and LA. In addition, in completing the FireTeam Assessment (CI), only the Rifle will be fired.

c. Combat Infantrymen (including RLC Soldier Pioneer Support — Regularand TA Units. In regular and TA units, combat infantrymen (including RLCPioneer Support soldiers) whose personal weapon is the Rifle, LSW or LMG —will complete TLFTT shoots as appropriate (see Table 1). Those personnel inheadquarters and the training organization are not required to fire with CWS orcomplete a Fire Team Assessment. In addition regular Infantry battalions are tocarry out an annual IFFC. The progression for this LFTT is given in Chapter 11.It is recognised for TA Infantry battalions that the opportunities for LFTT will belimited. Therefore it is not a mandatory requirement for TA Infantry battalions tocarry out an IFFC, but where the Safety requirements of Chapter 11 have beenmet and resources of training area, time, ammunition and qualified safety staffexist, a CO should conduct appropriate LFTT.

d. Other Arms and Services Personnel — Regular and TA Units. In regularand TA units, Other Arms and Services soldiers — less those personnel in head-quarters and the training organization— whose personal weapon is the Rifle orLSW will complete TLFTT Firing at Moving Targets and Fire Team Assessment(OA&Svcs). The Fire Team Assessment will include a battle fitness element andthe shoot will be defensive in nature. Formations that require troops, as part ofdirected training, to carry out LFTT are to ensure that LFMT and TLFTT havebeen achieved to the required safety standards contained in the relevantweapon chapters and Chapter 10 to this volume. Formations are also to ensurethat the necessary resources to support the planned LFTT have been bid for.

Evaluation

0131. The results of Annual Weapon Tests are to be formally recorded for everyindividual. Unit computer systems have the software enhancements necessary toensure this.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 1-9

realist

Highlight

realist

Highlight

0132. In addition, Regular and TA Infantry battalions and Other Arms and Servicesunits are to record the results of TLFTT shoots for Infantry and Other Arms andServices personnel as appropriate.

0133. Records of all unit shooting training and test results — with IFFC records forInfantry battalions — will form part of OPEVAL returns.

Exercising Troops

0134. The exercising troops are to be sufficiently trained to cope with the demands ofthe exercise. They are to be trained and tested to ensure competency on all weaponsand pyrotechnics they may use during such training. This training is to be documentedand the testing carried out by an appropriately qualified instructor. The progression oftraining is detailed in tabulated form here. The table has been designed for easyreference. Find in column (b) the type of live firing training to be conducted and thenread across to column (c) for the mandatory training that is specified to ensure thattroops are sufficiently well trained, current and competent to be able to cope with thedemands of the live firing activity or, where applicable, The Army AFV Shooting Policy(ASP) (Army Code No. 71671) is to be followed.

0135. The mandatory requirements specified in column (c) need not be completedin a single exercise period. The minimum requirement is that they are completed nomore than 12 months prior to the exercise and that the Exercise Director is satisfiedthat the troops remain current and competent. The exception to this rule is for WeaponHandling Tests (WHT) which are to be successfully completed no more than 6 monthsprior to the exercise.

Table 1. Progression of Training Table

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED1-10

Ser LF Activity Mandatory Desirable/Remarks(a) (b) (c) (d)1 LFMT

Stages 1 & 2 ofTraining the Battle Shot

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weapon

2 LFMTAPWT/APWA

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTWeapon zeroed and groupingstandard achievedAnnual LF lessons

TLFTTFire Team Assessment(FTA)

3 Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAnnual Weapon Assessment(AWA)

(See Note 3)

(See Notes 3 and 4)

(See Notes 3 and 4)

realist

Highlight

realist

Highlight

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 1-11

Ser LF Activity Mandatory Desirable/Remarks(a) (b) (c) (d)

7 LFTTIndividual Fire &Movement (F&M)Exercises by Night

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weapon Annual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indiv BSIndividual F&M by day

(See Notes 2, 3 and 4)

8 LFTTFire Team Attack byDay

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by day


9 LFTTFire Team Attack byNight

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by day

Individual F&M by night(See Notes 2, 3 and 4)

10 LFTTSect Attack by Day

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by day


6 LFTTIndividual Fire &Movement (F&M)Exercises by Day(See Note 1)

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indiv BS


5 LFTTDefence Exercises(Static) by Day or Night

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWA

Indv BS(See Notes 2, 3 and 4)

4 TLFTT & LFTTIndividual BattleShooting (Indv BS)

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWA

Indv BS can be fired onthe IBSR or CQBR. (See Notes 2, 3 and 4)

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED1-12


13 LFTTPl Attack by Night

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by dayFire Team Attack by nightSect Attack by dayPl Attack by day

14 LFTTCoy Attack by Day

Individual F&M by nightSection Attack by night(See Notes 2, 3 and 4)

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by daySect Attack by dayPl Attack by day


12 Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by daySect Attack by day

LFTTPl Attack by Day


11 LFTTSect Attack by Night

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by dayFire Team Attack by nightSect Attack by day

Individual F&M by night(See Notes 2, 3 and 4)

15 LFTTCoy Attack by Night

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BS

Individual F&M by nightSection Attack by night(See Notes 2, 3 and 4)

Notes:

1. Individual Fire & Movement is defined as an individual soldier producing coveringfire when his Battle Partner is moving and at the same time ensuring that he onlymoves when he has covering fire from his Battle Partner, i.e., Pairs Fire & Movement. 2. If automatic fire, firing at moving targets or firing with the CWS is to be employedduring LFTT, the exercising troops are to have previously completed the relevantTLFTT practices.3. Collimation may only be used as a substitute for zeroing if the weapon has beenpreviously zeroed and the Personal Zeroing Position (PZP) recorded and applied.4. Details of the annual LF lessons are promulgated in the relevant weapon chapter.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 1-13


17 LFTTBattle Group Attack byNight

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by dayFire Team Attack by nightSect Attack by dayPl Attack by dayPl Attack by nightCoy Attack by dayCoy Attack by night

Battle Group Attack byday(See Notes 2, 3 and 4)

16 LFTTBattle Group Attack byDay

Formally trained to use the wpnWHTZeroed or collimated weaponAnnual LF lessonsAWAFTA or Indv BSIndividual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by daySect Attack by dayPl Attack by dayCoy Attack by day


15(cont)

Individual F&M by dayFire Team Attack by dayFire Team Attack by nightSect Attack by dayPl Attack by dayPl Attack by nightCoy Attack by day

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED1-14

Chapter 2

MANAGEMENT OF SHOOTING TRAINING(PERSONAL WEAPONS)

Personal Weapon Concept

0201. Personal Weapon. Every officerand soldier, on joining a unit, is to beissued with a personal weapon. The indi-vidual’s appointment and the unit estab-lishment will determine whether his per-sonal weapon is to be a Rifle, LSW, LMGor Pistol. The individual is to retain thatweapon as his personal weapon whenpracticable except:

a. On posting and attendance oncourses.

b. When the weapon requiresrepair or replacement.

c. On change of appointment with-in a unit.

d. In accordance with the rules con-tained in Reference A (Pamphlet No.21) if officers or soldiers change their type of personal weapon during the year,having passed their Annual Weapon Tests, they are required to pass the WeaponHandling Tests (WHT) and Annual Personal Weapon Test (APWT) on the newpersonal weapon to ensure safe handling and effective operational use.

0202. Alternate Personal Weapon. A soldier’s alternate personal weapon willbe either the Rifle, LSW, LMG or Pistol:

a. For the Infantry, only fire team members, less commanders, will normallybe allocated an alternate personal weapon, as follows:

(1) Riflemen and LSW marksmen are allocated LMG.

(2) LMG gunners are allocated Rifle.

b. For all other Infantrymen, alternate personal weapons, normally Pistol, willonly be allocated if directed in operational theatre rules.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 2-1

CONTENTS

PERSONAL WEAPON CONCEPT 2-1

WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS 2-2

SAFETY 2-2

AMMUNITION 2-2

QUALIFICATION AND AUTHORIZATION 2-2

NIGHT SHOOTING 2-3

NBC CONDITIONS 2-3

PHYSICAL FITNESS 2-4

COMBAT SHOOTING COACHING 2-4

SHOOTING RECORDS 2-5

COMPETITION COMBAT SHOOTING 2-5

APWT RESULTS COLLATION 2-7

PURPOSE BUILT RANGES AND THEIR USES 2-8

c. For Other Arms and Services, alternate personal weapons are not nor-mally allocated unless directed by Arms and Services directors.

d. It is mandatory for all soldiers allocated an alternate personal weapon tocomplete the appropriate WHTs annually and fire the APWA. In the unlikelyevent that a soldiers personal/alternate personal weapon combination includesRifle and LSW an alternate WHT is not required.

0203. Test Requirements. Details of WHTs and AWAs, with respective TrainingPerformance Standards and Pass/Marksmanship Standards are in the specific per-sonal weapon chapter.

Written Instructions

0204. In accordance with Section 2 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21), it is manda-tory that a written instruction, either a Coordinating Instruction, Range Action andSafety Plan (RASP) or Exercise Action and Safety Plan (EASP) is produced for anyactivity involving the use of ammunition (including live, blank, pyrotechnics andexplosives). This applies equally to training on purpose built ranges, dry trainingareas and field firing areas.

Safety

0205. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed a safety test to prove theircompetency prior to their first live firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimumstandard of safety. Conducting officers must confirm that all soldiers firing anyweapon for the first time have completed the relevant WHTs prior to firing.

Ammunition

0206. LFMT and TLFTT. A guide for COs on Small Arms AmmunitionDistribution in a unit is given in Chapter 12. The distribution is based on a scale foreach individual by weapons for LFMT and TLFTT.

Qualification and Authorization

0207. SAA Instructor Qualification. It is mandatory that in all units the basicweapon handling lessons, laid down in the relevant weapon General Staff Publication(GSP), are given by a qualified small arms instructor; that is, someone who has suc-cessfully attended either SCBC (SAA Phase) or All Arms SAA Instructors course whothemselves are proven competent to handle the weapons being taught.

0208. Course Qualification. The qualification needed by an officer, WO or NCOto plan, conduct and supervise live firing, is to have attended and qualified on an

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED2-2

appropriate course in the Infantry Training Organisation or to have attended one ofthe qualifying courses listed in Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21).

0209. Pamphlet No 21. Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21) also lays down the pow-ers of COs and the rules to be followed if they wish to authorize non-qualified per-sonnel to conduct ranges. Definitions of Plan (Planning), Conduct (Conducting) andSafety Supervisors are also given. These descriptions govern all range work plan-ning and have strict safety applications, in particular for LFTT.

Night Shooting

0210. Importance. Night shooting is a key element of meeting the OSR and can-not be over-emphasised. Night shooting, at the LNV, with CWS and with HMNVS andLA live firing (LF) lessons and assessments are included as operational shootingskills covered in Stage 4 TLFTT. Night shooting exercises are included in the sug-gested shooting progression in LFTT.

0211. Limit of Night Visibility (LNV). The night shooting requirement for AllArms and Services is to fire at the LNV using the SUSAT or by instinctive pointing ofthe iron sight.

0212. Firing with CWS. Firing with CWS applies only to the Infantry. To gainmaximum benefit from CWS it is to be issued as a personal equipment item to select-ed Primary Users. In addition, all other members of a unit are to be consideredSecondary Users of CWS. CWS shoots are designated for both Primary andSecondary Users out to 300 metres.

0213. Firing with HMNVS and LA. Firing with HMNVS and LA applies only to theInfantry. All members of the section will be equipped with HMNVS. Two men in eachfire team are issued LA, providing the capability for shapshooting from the patrol posi-tion and accurate fire from other combat fire positions out to 200 metres.

0214. Night Firing with Illumination. It is anticipated that the majority of nightfiring with illumination will take place during LFTT. However, if either ground or air-borne illuminants are available, units are encouraged to include night shooting withillumination practices during their standard range firing periods. There is sufficientscope within the LF lessons in LFMT, for units to select appropriate night shootingwith illumination practices to match the standard of their soldiers’ training. In doingso, however, the appropriate parts of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21) should be readto determine the safety constraints for ranges.

NBC Conditions

0215. To prepare the soldier for the NBC threat, it is necessary that Skill at Armstraining — both weapon handling and marksmanship — be carried out wearing pro-tective clothing. NBC LF lessons and an Annual Assessment have therefore been

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 2-3

included as an operational shooting skill covered in Stage 4 TLFTT. Where possibleNBC LF should be conducted in full IPE. The minimum level of NBC protection thatshould be worn is respirator and NBC gloves. Units are also to carry out some LFTTwearing NBC protection.

Physical Fitness

0215. Requirement. Unless a soldier is fully fit he is unlikely to be able to shootto the best of his ability under operational conditions. Physical fitness and coordina-tion are essential for accurate shooting and are to be fully integrated into the trainingsequence. A soldier must physically be able to:

a. Handle his personal weapon without unnecessary strain in all firing posi-tions.

b. Control his breathing, particularly after physical exertion.

0216. Place in Training the Battle Shot. Although general physical fitness isnecessary, particular emphasis is to be given to strengthening the muscles in theupper body that are required for shooting, particularly in the unsupported firing posi-tions. In LFMT soldiers are not expected to fire under physically strenuous conditionsbut rather concentrate on improving their basic marksmanship skills. Short dashesare incorporated into the practices to simulate the rapid move to a firing positionbefore firing. Endurance fitness becomes a factor in TLFTT where the Fire TeamAssessments for Infantry and Other Arms and Services are preceded by a two miletimed approach march.

Combat Shooting Coaching

0217. Importance. The importance of combat shooting coaching cannot be over-emphasised. Comparisons can be made to any other skill or sport — expert tuitionand practice are essential. During All Arms Phase 1 Recruit Training at ATRs/AFC orduring Infantry Phase 2 Training, instructors will invariably be qualified and trained oncoaching techniques and procedures. If standards are to be maintained andimproved on, and backward shots developed, combat shooting coaching is equallyimportant in units.

0218. Role of the Unit Training Officer (UTO). The UTO is responsible to theCO for the planning and co-ordination of unit shooting standards to meet operationalrequirements. A major task of the UTO, therefore, is to train sub-unit combat shoot-ing coaches and monitor their performance. After learning the techniques and pro-cedures, a combat shooting coach can only become effective by practising, and COsmust encourage this.

0219. Qualities of the Combat Shooting Coach. Combat shooting coachesneed the following key qualities:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED2-4

a. To be a good instructor — to be enthusiastic, convincing and patient.

b. To be a good shot — with a sound understanding of this volume and thecombat shooting coaching techniques and procedures.

0220. Related Information. Information on combat shooting coaching and howto train the sub-unit combat shooting coach is contained in Infantry Training VolumeII, Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle 5.56 mm Modified L85A2, Light Support Weapon ModifiedL86A2 and Associated Equipments and Infantry Training, Volume II, Pamphlet No. 6,The 5.56mm Rifle and Light Support Weapon. Pamphlet No. 5 and Pamphlet No. 6also contain information on Zeroing, Boresighting, the Small Arms Collimator (SAC),Training the Backward Shot, Fun Shooting and the System of Scaling Down Targets.

Shooting Records

0221. The following shooting records should be maintained for all soldiers:

a. AB 608 — Personal Weapon Record Book.

b. AFB 6994A/B — Personal Weapon Zero Cards, both of which are to bekept in the flap of the individual’s Personal Weapon Record Book along withany AMS printouts.

c. AFB 6997 — Sub-Unit Shooting Record, to be held and maintained in thesub-unit office to enable the sub-unit commander to monitor the shooting abilityof his soldiers.

d. Results of mandatory tests on unit computer systems.

Combat Shooting Competitions

0222. Purpose and Value of Combat Shooting Competitions. The value ofcombat shooting competitions is too often underestimated. Service combat shootingcompetition is an integral and important part of a soldier’s shooting training. Matchesexist for Rifle, Sniper Rifle, LSW, GPMG(SF), Pistol and LMG. Its value in meetingthe requirements of operational shooting can be highlighted in the following areas:

a. Incentive. Competition is a powerful incentive to units and individuals toaspire to high standards of marksmanship.

b. Interest. Competition matches maintain interest. They are framed to pro-vide a real challenge and will usually be more difficult than the APWT. Interestwill be maintained if units enter competitions regularly.

c. Battle Training. Competition stress has a similar effect to battle stress.The keener the competition, the greater the pressure. Simultaneous firing of

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 2-5

team combat shooting matches are a particularly good way of creating pres-sure. Qualities which competition shooting develops include Determination,Esprit de Corps, Concentration, Self Confidence and Confidence in Weaponsand Equipment.

0223. Army Rifle Association (ARA). The ARA is part of Headquarters Infantry,under the Chief of Staff, and is located at the National Shooting Centre at Bisley,Surrey. Amongst other tasks, the ARA is responsible for coordinating central andnon-central service weapon shooting competitions, especially the annual CentralSkill-at-Arms Meeting (CENTSAM) at Bisley. Such competitions are an indispensableelement in attaining and maintaining the marksmanship standards required in battleshooting. The ARA is responsible for reviewing Infantry Training, Volume IV, Ranges,Pamphlet No. 20 Competition Shooting (Army Code No. 71062), which contains rulesand conditions of all competitive matches to ensure that these keep in step with cur-rent operational marksmanship requirements. This pamphlet is the basis for the con-duct of all Single Service, Inter-Service and Joint Service service weapons competi-tion shooting.

0224. ARA Service Weapon Competitions. The details of all ARA ServiceWeapon competitions are given in Pamphlet No. 20. In summary matches are organ-ised as follows:

a. Central Matches. Central matches are those organised and fired byunits, corps and District/Division at Skill at Arms Meetings (SAAMs). Theyshould be organized on the broadest possible basis with teams made up of allclasses of shots. A good shooting team is an invaluable asset as it is a sourceof shooting ‘know how’ and the team members should be used as coaches toassist the unit training staff. District/Division and Command SAAMs are alsothe vehicle for selecting individual firers to compete annually in CENTSAM,which includes the Queen’s Medal Competition for Shooting Excellence.

b. Non-Central Matches. Non-central matches are those fired on unitranges or at specific weapons concentrations, such as for GPMG(SF) orSniper. They are of particular value in maintaining interest and ensuring shoot-ing is practised throughout the year.

0225. Territorial Army Rifle Association (TARA). All TA competition shooting isconducted in accordance with Pamphlet No. 20 and is controlled by TARA, also locat-ed at Bisley, which runs the central TA SAM during CENTSAM, when the ReserveForces fire their annual Queen’s Medal Competition.

APWT Results Collation

0226. The APWT results collation will now provide the means through which Armyoperational shooting standards will be monitored. At the end of each ITD (A) TrainingYear, Headquarters Infantry will publish a summary of the scores, giving the follow-ing information:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED2-6

a. Percentage of the unit that have passed the APWT in that year.

b. Percentage of marksmen (Infantry Units only).

0227. These figures will form the basis of the consolidated annual results, fromwhich the ARA Trophies and Tickle Bequest prize money will be awarded. DirectorInfantry will formally commend the Infantry Battalion that records the highest numberof marksmen in that Training Year.

0228. The results of all personnel in Regular Units and Independent Sub-Units ofall Arms Services are included. The process for forwarding results falls into threecomponents: registration, forwarding results and confirmation:

a. Registration. In order to register, early in the training year units will for-ward, direct to OC Combat Marksmanship Training Team (CMTT) their currentactual unit strength against establishment.

b. Forwarding Results. Units are to forward, direct to OC CMTT all APWTbutt registers/AMS Summary Sheet printouts throughout the Training Year.These results can be submitted either as they are completed or periodically,they must not be left until the end of the Training Year. A completed “APWTResults Summary Sheet”, must be attached to each batch of APWTscores. An example summary sheet is at Annex A to this chapter.

c. Confirmation. As at 31 March units are to confirm, direct to OC CMTT,the lowest actual unit strength during that Training Year, to allow comparisonwith the number of firers recorded and forward any remaining APWT butt reg-isters/AMS summary sheet printouts.

0229. The Chain of Command support to this process will include periodic spotchecks to ensure units are conducting the APWT fairly and that results are beingrecorded accurately.

0230. Every unit in the Army is required to fire the APWT, and as such it should notbe an onerous burden to record and forward these results for collation and publication.

0231. Pistol and Young Officers Matches. In order to identify the Champion YOand the Champion Pistol Unit, two different methods of recording and reporting scoreswill be used:

a. APWT. All Pistol and Young Officers APWT results, scored in accordancewith this publication, are to be forwarded to CMTT as per paragraph 0228.

b. Match 81, Matches 85A/85B and Matches 89A/89B. Match 81, The ArmyPistol (Team) Match, Match 85A Champion YO Infantry, Match 85B ChampionInfantry YO Team and Match 89A and Match 89B, The Other Arms and ServicesYO Matches, will continue to be administered by the ARA. These matchesshould be fired concurrently with the APWT, but scored in accordance with

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 2-7

Pamphlet No. 20. Units are to apply for Match Registers, for these events only,to HQ ARA, Hythe Lodge, Elcho Road, Bisley Camp, Brookwood, Surrey (Tel:Military 94211 8084, Civilian 01483 798084 or Fax 01483 799821) and returncompleted registers by no later than 15 April. YOs are defined as all SecondLieutenants and Lieutenants (Less LE) at Regimental Service, including those inATRA units and of both sexes.

Purpose Built Ranges and Their Use

0232. The following purpose built ranges are available for Training the Battle Shot:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED2-8

Serial Type of Range Type of Training

4 25 Metre Barrack Range These ranges will gradually supersede theexisting 25 m Range. Their function isidentical to the 25 m Range but they have6 lanes.

5 Gallery Range/ConvertedGallery Range (CGR)

1. LFMT Stage 1 (Grouping and Zeroing).2. LFMT Stage 2 (Application of Fire).3. LFMT Stage 3 (Annual Weapon Tests).4. TLFTT.

a. Fire Team Assessments.b. Operational Shooting Skills.

5. Training of sub unit shooting coaches.

1 Small Arms Trainer (SAT)orDismounted Close CombatTrainer (DCCT)

1. Simulated firing of LFMT and someTLFTT of Training the Battle Shot.2. Individual and team advanced marks-manship shoots using authored practicesor video.3. Remedial training for backward shots.4. Training of sub unit shooting coaches.

2 Tube/Pipe Range 1. Confirmation of zeroing.2. Predominantly in NI bases.

3 25 Metre Range 1. Introduction to full bore shooting.2. Practice at grouping shoots and remedi-al training.3. Zeroing (only if a 100 m range is notavailable).4. Training of sub unit shooting coaches.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 2-9

Serial Type of Range Type of Training

9 300 Metre Baffled RangeGerman Type B/Type C

1. Type B (Rifle Practices Only).2. Type C (Rifle and Machine GunPractices).Note: No firing between firing points.

10 Individual Battle ShootingRange (IBSR)

1. LFTT.a. Close Quarter Battle (CQB).b. Attack (up to pairs only).c. Defence.

2. These ranges are purpose built.

6 Electric Target Range (ETR) 1. LFMT Stage 1 (Grouping and Zeroing).2. LFMT Stage 2 (Application of Fire).3. LFMT Stage 3 (Annual Weapon Tests).4. TLFTT.

a. Fire Team Assessments.b. Operational Shooting Skills.

5. Training of sub unit shooting coaches.7 Mechanical Moving Target

Trainer Range (MMTTR)1. LFMT Stage 1 (Grouping and Zeroing).2. TLFTT. 3. Firing at Moving Targets (6 lanes).

8 100 Metre Baffle Range A study is currently in progress to approvea new design for the 100 m Baffled Range.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED2-10

ANNEX A TOCHAPTER 2

APWT RESULTS SUMMARY SHEET

Unit: ...................................................... Tel No: (Code/Ext) .............................

Completed by: (Rank/Name) ....................................................................................

Weapon Type: Rifle / LSW / LMG / Pistol

Range Used: ETR / CGR / Gallery AMS Used: Yes /No

Note: Answer Weapon Type, Range and AMS Used questions by circling theanswer.

Total number of personnel firing APWT: ................

Number of personnel firing a first attempt at APWT that training year: ................

Number of personnel achieving a first time pass: ................(pass at all firing distances)

Number of personnel to pass after retesting at failed firing distance(s): ................

Number of first time pass personnel qualified as marksman: ................

SEND COMPLETED SUMMARY SHEET TO:

Hard Copy: CMTT E-Mail: TAG (UK) – CMTT Officer CommandingSASC TAG (UK) or TAG (UK) – CLKQueen Elizabeth BarracksStrensallYORK N Yorks All enquiries to: OC CMTTYO32 3SW Tel: 94772 2900

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 2A-1

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED2A-2

Chapter 3

THE RIFLE

Scope

0301. Chapter 3 sets out all Rifle live fir-ing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMTStages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the BattleShot. It includes the application of LFlessons to all Arms and Services and theprogression and frequency with which theyare to be fired.

0302. This progression and frequency offiring is essential for preparing soldiers forRifle Annual Personal Weapon Tests(APWT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essen-tial in preparing the firer for mandatoryTLFTT and LFTT. The detail of TLFTT andLFTT is in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively.

0303. The L22A1 Carbine is categorisedas a Rifle. The OMS requirement for theCarbine is the same as for the Rifle APWT(TS) (SUSAT).

Simulation and Technology0304. Small Arms Trainer (SAT) andDismounted Close Combat Trainer(DCCT). SAT or DCCT LF lessons are anintegral part of Training the Battle Shot and have been selected to confirm the basicskills in each Stage before live firing and to enable the coach to eliminate faults whichhave hitherto only been detectable during live firing. All Rifle LF lessons and APWTsare included in the SAT and DCCT software and can be used for practice, remedialtraining or as concurrent activity to a range or other period. (The SAT or DCCT can-not be used as a substitute for live firing of any Annual Weapon Test or Assessment.)

0305. Automatic Marking System (AMS). Vital shooting and coaching informa-tion can be gained, and time, manpower and ammunition saved, by the correct useof AMS. It permits Grouping, Zeroing and Elementary Application of Fire lessons tobe conducted on Electric Target Ranges (ETR) and Converted Gallery Ranges(CGR) without using butt markers or screen targets. In Advanced Application of Firelessons, AMS can be used to indicate to the firer and coach where shots are hittingor missing the target. RCOs are to ensure their coaches are thoroughly familiar with

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-1

CONTENTS

SCOPE 3-1


AIDS TO TRAINING AND FIRING 3-2

TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE 3-2

SAFETY 3-5

CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS 3-5

WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERALINSTRUCTIONS 3-7

DEFINITION OF STANDARDS 3-8

WHTs 3-8

LF LESSON 1 3-13LF LESSON 2 3-15LF LESSON 3 3-17LF LESSON 4 3-19LF LESSON 5 3-23LF LESSON 6 3-25LF LESSON 7 3-29LF LESSON 8 3-33LF LESSON 9 3-39LF LESSON 10 3-45LF LESSON 11 3-49LF LESSON 12 3-55LF LESSON 13 3-61

APWT/APWA (CI) 3-69APWT/APWA (OA & SVCS) 3-79

NAVY APWT (NAPWT) 3-85

AMS before any LF lesson begins. All LF lessons are contained in AMS software.Where the targetry differs because of AMS, the difference is highlighted in the rele-vant lesson(s).

0306. Electronic Automatic Sequence Initiator (EASI). Where fitted on ETRsand CGRs, EASI is to be used by RCOs in Advanced Application of Fire lessons andAPWTs. This will save time and reduce the probability of target initiation andsequencing errors. When EASI is used, the Time Charts provided are not requiredbut should be available as a back up.

Aids to Training and Firing0307. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). To avoid wasting time and ammunition theSAC is to be used to reduce excessive displacement between the Mean Point ofImpact (MPI) and the Correct Zero Position (CZP) before zeroing. When rifles fittedwith SUSAT have been zeroed, the SAC is to be used to record the Personal ZeroPosition (PZP) readings. Thereafter, SAC is to be used before any LF lesson toensure that boresight readings have not changed. To save range time it is recom-mended that boresighting is conducted on the day prior to the lesson.

0308. Tracer. Tracer ammunition should be used to assist in the observation ofstrike when firing Advanced Application of Fire shoots (Rifle LF Lessons 9, 12 and13). There are strict limitations on the use of tracer on some types of range and undercertain climatic conditions. Range orders will specify any limitations that are in force.

0309. Sandbags. The use of the sandbag for support while shooting is no longerpermissible during any lessons or tests in LFMT or TLFTT.

Training and Firing Sequence0310. Other Arms Phase 1 Training. The LF lessons listed below are to be firedby all recruits during Phase 1 Training using Iron Sight. Other Arms and Services TArecruits are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-2

Rifle LFLesson No Content Page No

LFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing

1 SAT/DCCT — Grouping at 25 metres (Prone) 3-13 to 3-14

2 SAT/DCCT — Grouping at 25 metres (Other Positions)

3-15 to 3-16

3 Introductory Shoot at 25 metres (All Positions) 3-17 to 3-19

4 Zeroing at 100 metres (Prone) and Grouping at100 metres (Other Positions)

3-19 to 3-22

5 Application of the Group at 100 metres (AllPositions)

3-23 to 3-24

0311. Combat Infantrymans Course (CIC). On successful completion of LFLessons 1-9 the following LF lessons are to be fired by trainee Combat Infantrymenduring the CIC using SUSAT:

0312. Combat Infantrymen — Regular and TA Units. The following LF lessonsare to be fired annually by all combat infantrymen in regular and TA units usingSUSAT:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-3


LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire

6 SAT/DCCT — Elementary Application of Fire up to 300 metres (All Positions)

3-25 to 3-28

7 Elementary Application of Fire up to 300metres (All Positions)

3-29 to 3-32

8 SAT/DCCT — Advanced Application of Fire upto 300 metres (All Positions)

3-33 to 3-37

9 Advanced Application of Fire up to 300 metres(All Positions)

3-39 to 3-43




3-45 to 3-48

11 SAT/DCCT — Elementary Application of Fireup to 400 metres (All Positions)

3-49 to 3-53


3-55 to 3-60

13 Further Advanced Application of Fire up to 400metres (All Positions)

3-61 to 3-67





3-45 to 3-48

0313. Other Arms and Services Personnel — Regular and TA Units. The fol-lowing LF lessons are to be fired annually by Other Arms and Services personnel inregular and TA units using Iron Sights:

0314. Personnel Issued with Carbine. The following lessons are to be fired dur-ing initial training and then annually by all personnel issued Carbine:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-4




3-55 to 3-60

13 Further Advanced Application of Fire up to400 metres (All Positions)

3-61 to 3-67




3-19 to 3-22


6 SAT/DCCT — Elementary Application of Fireup to 300 metres (All Positions)

3-25 to 3-28


3-39 to 3-43




3-45 to 3-48


7 Elementary Application of Fire up to 300metres (All Positions)

3-29 to 3-32


3-39 to 3-43

0315. Remedial Training. SAT/DCCT and AMS provide invaluable aids to theremedial training of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facil-ities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use oflive firing. All Rifle LF lessons can be fired on SAT/DCCT and may be used as aremedial aid or as a rehearsal prior to firing on the open range.

Safety

0316. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed a safety test prior to their firstlive firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conductingofficers must confirm that all soldiers firing any weapon for the first time have com-pleted the relevant WHTs prior to firing.

Conduct of LF Lessons

0317. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and out-line range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirementsspecific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson.

0318. Stores. The following stores are required:

Rifles complete to CES 1 per soldierCleaning material As requiredIssued, serviceable hearing protection 1 per soldierCombat helmets 1 per soldierCBA (where issued) 1 per soldierPersonal Shooting Record Card (AF B6994A/B) 1 per soldierCoaching Aide Memoire (AF B 71158) 1 per coachBinoculars 1 per coachFirst aid kit CompleteSAC As requiredStop watches As required

0319. Dress. Dress for Rifle LF lessons should include belt order webbing.Combat Helmets and CBA where issued are to be worn for all SAT and LF lessons.The dress rules for Phase One Recruits and Trainee Combat Infantrymen should beapplied sensibly with a gradual increase in the amount of additional equipment.However, the conditions for the APWT are to be rigorously applied.

0320. SAT/DCCT. Soldiers are to fire the boresighting practice before firing anyother shoots using SAT/DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices onSAT/DCCT in order to familiarise themselves with the conditions.

0321. SAC. The SAC is to be used to boresight the rifle prior to firing a groupingpractice. Once zeroed, the reading from SAC is to be noted in the firers’ shootingrecord card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future live firing lesson. TheSAC cannot be used for lessons fired on SAT/DCCT.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-5

0322. Weapon and Firing Preparation.

a. Where possible, rifles should be prepared for firing prior to moving to therange, to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those thatmay be experienced on the range.

b. Each soldier is to have the issued, serviceable hearing protection and hisshooting record card in his possession.

c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. Duringgrouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the cor-rect Point of Aim (POA) for each shot and avoid aiming off.

d. If fire trenches are not available the prone position is to be used.

0323. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be the bot-tom centre of the patch to cater for both Iron Sight and SUSAT.

0324. Coaching. Infantry Training Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle5.56 mm Modified L85A2, Light Support Weapon Modified L86A2 and AssociatedEquipments (Army Code No. 71753) and Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pamphlet No. 6, The 5.56 mm Rifle and Light Support Weapon (LSW) (Army CodeNo. 71374) contain full detail of coaching requirements. Some essential points toensure are:

a. The RCO and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge ofcoaching techniques.

b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficientcoaches the Master Coach system should be used.

c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300.Soldiers are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing suppressiveshoots at 400 metres.

d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to berecorded on the firers’ personal shooting record card.

e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary andadvanced application of fire practices.

0325. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches togain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detailshould be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot. Toachieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are givenevery opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-6

0326. Standards. Soldiers who do not attain the required standards should begiven further coaching and firing practice before firing again.

0327. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the endof each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson.

0328. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the followingdrills are to be completed once the range is cleared:

a. Questions from the firers on the range period.

b. Normal safety precautions/declaration.

c. Pack kit.

d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, forecastof next LF lesson.

WHTs General Instructions

0329. Purpose. The purpose of WHTs is to provide a measure of personalweapon handling skill throughout the Army in line with operational safety and han-dling requirements. Mandatory testing ensures that handling skills of all personnel,up to and including the rank of lieutenant colonel, are monitored accurately and rec-tified if necessary. It is an indication of a unit's operational readiness.

0330. Testing and Results.

a. Soldiers whose personal weapon is the LSW and whose alternate person-al weapon is the Rifle are to be tested on their personal weapon only. All testsare to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, current and com-petent instructor. Standards are to be measured:

(1) At appropriate stages during Other Arms Phase 1 Recruit Trainingand on its completion.

(2) At appropriate stages during the CIC Training and on its completion.

(3) Every six months in regular and TA units.

b. Results. Results are to be recorded in personal shooting records and onunit computer systems.

0331. Conduct. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carriedout in barracks using drill ammunition.

0332. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combathelmet and CBA where issued.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-7

Definition of Standards

0333. Handling Standards. Handling Standards achieved in WHTs are definedas:

Skilled — Pass in Test 1 and Skilled standard in all other tests.

Average — Pass in Test 1 and a minimum of Average standard in all othertests.

Fail — Fail in any test.

0334. Training Performance Standards. The Training Performance Standardsto be achieved for the Rifle are:

WHTs RIFLE

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-8

Rifle as Personal Weapon Skilled

Rifle as Alternate Personal Weaponto Pistol or LMG Average

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking

1 Safety Rifle, loaded.Safety Catchat ‘F’, changelever at ‘R’.Weapon lyingon theground.

1. Order the soldier to fetchthe weapon. The soldier,without further direction, isto:

a. Pick up the weapon, putthe safety catch to ‘S’. b. Remove the magazineand check that the cham-ber is clear.

2. Order the soldier to handover the weapon. The sol-dier is to:

a. Point the muzzle in asafe direction, check thatthe safety catch is at ‘S’and the change lever to‘R’, cock the weapon,depress the holding opencatch, show the weapon isclear and ease springs.

The soldier isto be awarded‘Fail’ if thesafety actionsare not carriedout as listed.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-9


2 Stripping,CleaningandAssembling

Rifle with slingfitted, unload-ed, cleaningroll (with com-bination toolout), flan-nelette andoil.

1. Standard:Skilled — Nomistakes. Average — 1to 3 mistakes.Fail — morethan 3 mis-takes.2. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

1. Order the soldier to stripthe Rifle as for daily clean-ing. Ask the following ques-tions:

a. What size flannelette isused to clean the barrel?b. What size flannelette isused to oil the barrel?c. What are the differ-ences to normal dailycleaning when in the fol-lowing conditions?(choose any 2 conditions)

(1) Heavy rain and dampconditions.(2) Dry, sandy or dustyconditions.(3) Cold and extremecold conditions.(4) Hot, wet conditions.

2. Order the soldier to indi-cate the parts of the combi-nation tool that are used toclean the gas plug andcylinder.3. Order the soldier toassemble the Rifle/LSW andtest the functioning of theweapon. 1. On the command “Go”the soldier fills his magazinewith 30 rounds by hand.

Instructor’s Note: Leavemagazines filled.

3 MagazineFilling

30 rounds,magazine,stopwatch.

Standard:Skilled — 60seconds orless.Average — 61to 75 seconds.Fail — Over 75seconds.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-10


4 Loading –StandingPosition

Rifle, one fullmagazine infastenedpouch.

Give the command “Load”.Pouches must be refas-tened.

Instructor’s Note: Leaveweapon loaded for Test No5.

1. The soldieris to be toldthat no timelimit is imposedbut that allactions shouldbe carried outquickly andcorrectly.2. Standard:Skilled — Allactions correct.Average — 1or 2 mistakes.Fail — Morethan 2 mis-takes.3. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

5 IA andStoppages

Rifle loaded(from Test No4), represen-tative targets.

1. Order“Down–ready–test andadjust–rapid fire”.2. Order “Rifle firingalright–rifle stops”. Soldieris to carry out theIA…“Cocking handle fullyforward”. Soldier is to tapforward cocking handle andcontinue firing.3. Order “Rifle firingalright–rifle stops”. Soldieris to carry out theIA…“Cocking handle fullyforward”. Soldier is to tapforward cocking handle andcontinue firing “Rifle stillfails to fire”.4. On examination of bodyand chamber order“Rounds in magazine-chamber clear”. Allow sol-

1. The actionstested arethose relatingto the IA andstoppages only.2. The soldieris to be toldthat no timelimit is imposedbut that allactions shouldbe carried outquickly andcorrectly.3. Standard:Skilled — Allactions correct.Average — 1or 2 mistakes.Fail — Morethan 2 mis-takes.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-11


5(cont)

dier to complete the drill andfire.5. Order “Rifle fires one ortwo rounds and stopsagain”.Once the soldier hascarried out the IA order“Cocking handle fully for-ward”. Soldier is to tap for-ward cocking handle andcontinue firing “Rifle stillfails to fire”. On examina-tion of body and chamberorder“Rounds in the mag-azine-chamber clear”.

Note: The test is not com-plete until the safety catch isset at ‘F’, the weapon re-aimed and the trigger oper-ated.6. Order “Stop”.

4. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

6 Unloading Rifle loadedand ready(from Test No5)

This test follows on fromTest No 5. Give the com-mand “Unload”. The test isnot complete until the sol-dier has recovered theejected round, replaced it inthe magazine and fastenedthe pouch.


LF Lessons 1 – 13

0335. The details of LF Lessons 1 – 13 and the APWT/APWA are contained in theremaining pages of this chapter. Each lesson is contained in separate pages for easyuse.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-12


7 Basic WindTables

Rifle, figuretargets (repre-sentative tar-gets can beused)

Standard:Skilled — Allcorrect.Average — 1correct answer.Fail — Lessthan 1 correctanswer.

Ask the soldier to indicatetwo different points of aimby asking him one questionfrom each of the sectionsbelow. Allow him to use amap pin and figure target toindicate his answer.SECTION Aa. Fresh Wind L to R.Target Distance — 200 m.b. Strong Wind R to L.Target Distance — 200 m.SECTION Ba. Strong Wind L to R.Target Distance — 300 m.b. Fresh Wind R to L.Target Distance — 300 m.

RIFLE LF 1. — SAT/DCCT – GROUPING AT 25 METRES (PRONE)

A. INSTRUCTOR’S NOTES

LF0101. Aim. To confirm that the soldier can hold, aim and fire his rifle correctlyin the prone position.

LF0102. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted using SAT or DCCT. If SAT/DCCT is not available the lesson may be conducted using 5.56 mm ammunition at25 metres.

LF0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete allpractices.

LF0104. Stores.

Complete SAT/DCCT equipmentor

Normal range stores (25 m range)1 x witness screen target with 2 x 25 mm square aiming marks per firer20 rounds 5.56mm Ball (if required) ammunition per firer

LF0105. Miscellaneous. Instructors should be aware that additional time may berequired in this lesson for the adjustment of sights to obtain correct eye relief.

B. CONDUCT OF THE LESSON

Preliminaries

LF0106. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

LF0107. Preparing the Rifle for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures forcleaning the rifle before firing.

LF0108. Confirmation. Confirm by practice. Prepare the rifles for firing.

LF0109. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary therange safety rules applicable to SAT/DCCT.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-13

Practice Details

LF0110. Practice details are as follows:

Standards

LF0111. The average group size that should be achieved in the repeat practice is85 mm.

End of Lesson Procedure

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-14

Practice Range/Position Ammo Target/Exposure

1. Fire a 5 roundgroup at eachaiming mark.2. The firer is toapply his safetycatch and standup after eachgroup.3. Discuss thegroups and recordthe group sizes.4. Repeat thepractice.

Instructions

1. Grouping(Fired Twice)

25 mProne

20rounds

2 x 25 mmsquare aimingmarks

RIFLE LF 2. — SAT/DCCT – GROUPING AT 25 METRES(OTHER POSITIONS)


LF0201. Aim. To practise the soldier in holding, aiming and firing his rifle cor-rectly in the sitting unsupported, kneeling unsupported/squatting and standing unsup-ported positions.

LF0202. Conduct. This practice is to be conducted using SAT/DCCT. If SAT/DCCT is not available the lesson may be conducted using 5.56 mm ammunition at25 metres.


LF0204. Stores.


Normal range stores (25 m range)1 x witness screen target with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks per firer40 rounds 5.56 mm Ball (if required) ammunition per firer

LF0205. Miscellaneous. The Coach is to explain to the firer that the position ofthe group is not relevant at this stage and that the MPI will be adjusted during latershoots. However, the firer should note that the MPI is likely to change depending onthe position being used.


Preliminaries



LF0208. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary therange safety rules applicable to SAT/DCCT.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-15

Practice Details


Standards

LF0210. The average group sizes that should be achieved in the repeat practiceare:

Sitting Unsupported — 95 mmKneeling Unsupported — 100 mmSquatting — 100 mmStanding Unsupported — 160 mm


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-16

Practice Range/Position Ammo Target/Exposure Instructions

1. Fire a 5 roundgroup from eachof the nominatedpositions.2. Discuss thegroups and recordthe group sizes.3. Repeat thepractice.


25 mSitting

Unsupported,Kneeling

Unsupported,Squatting,Standing

Unsupported

40rounds


RIFLE LF 3. — INTRODUCTORY SHOOT AT 25 METRES (ALL POSITIONS)


LF0301. Aim. To confirm that the soldier knows how to prepare the rifle for firing.To confirm that he can aim, hold and fire his rifle in the prone, sitting unsupported,kneeling unsupported or squatting and standing positions and confirm that he knowshow to clean the rifle after firing.

LF0302. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETRwith screens placed 25 metres from firers.

LF0303. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete allpractices.

LF0304. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x witness screen with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks per firer40 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

LF0305. Miscellaneous. If the MPI of the groups in the prone position are badlymisplaced from the CZP, the sights should be adjusted by the coach to avoid the pos-sibility of wasting ammunition at 100 metres during Rifle LF 4. (These adjustmentsshould not be discussed with the firer.)


Preliminaries



LF0308. Confirmation. Confirm by practice. Prepare the rifles for firing.

LF0309. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the rangesafety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

LF0310. Firing Practice. Explain that a soldier who can fire his shots into a smallgroup can become a good shot. He will not group well unless:

a. He is determined that each shot will be a good one.

b. He applies the marksmanship principles.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-17

c. He always aims in the same place, i.e. the bottom centre of the patch.

d. He tells the coach what the aim picture was like at the moment of firing.

LF0311. Confirmation. Confirm by questions.

Practice Details


Standards

LF0313. The group sizes that should be achieved in the repeat practice are:

Prone — 65 mmSitting Unsupported — 75 mmKneeling Unsupported/Squatting — 80 mmStanding Unsupported — 140 mm

After Firing Procedure

LF0314. Cleaning after Firing. Confirm Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling.

LF0315. Confirmation. Confirm by practice. Rifles are to be inspected and leftlightly oiled.

LF0316. Care after Cleaning. Remind: Under normal circumstances the bore,chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and re-oiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the rifle has been fired.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-18


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup from eachof the nominatedpositions.2. Discuss thegroups and recordthe group sizes.3. Repeat thepractice.


25 m ProneSitting

Unsupported,Kneeling

Unsupported orSquatting,Standing

Unsupported

40rounds


RIFLE LF 4. — ZEROING AT 100 METRES (PRONE) ANDGROUPING AT 100 METRES (OTHER POSITIONS)


LF0401. Aim. To superimpose the soldiers’ MPI onto the CZP, and compare theMPI of groups fired from the kneeling unsupported/squatting, sitting unsupported,standing unsupported and fire trench positions and note any requirement to aim off.

LF0402. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or with-out AMS), an ETR if converted to AMS or a GR.


LF0404. Stores.

Normal range stores2 x 1.220 m screens with Figure 11 per firer each witha 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with thebottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure

or1 x Figure 12d per firer (on AMS converted range)45 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (additional ammunition may be required for reshoots)

LF0405. Miscellaneous.

a. Firers must achieve a 300mm group with 20 rounds from the prone posi-tion at 100 metres during Practice 1 before their sights are adjusted.

b. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and soldiers (when applicable) are tobe fully conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle 5.56 mm Modified L85A2, Light Support WeaponModified L86A2 and Associated Equipments 2001 (Army Code No. 71753) orInfantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 6, 5.56 mm Rifle andLight Support Weapon (Army Code No. 71374) relating to Zeroing.

c. Weapons must be collimated or boresighted before live firing commences.

d. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of theMPI from the CZP when firing from positions other than prone. Coaches are toemphasise the importance of this to their firers.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-19


Preliminaries



Practice DetailsLF0408. Practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-20


1. Fire 4 x 5round groups atthe same aimingmark.2. The firer is toapply his safetycatch, stand up,then re-adopt hisposition betweeneach group.3. Discuss thegroup and mea-sure the groupsize.4. Identify theMPI and adjust forzero if necessary.

1. Grouping 100 mProne

20rounds

Figure 11 with 75mm x 100 mmwhite patch on ascreenorAMS Figure 12d

2. CheckGroup

100 mProne

5rounds


1. Fire a 5 roundcheck group toconfirm zero.2. If the correctzero is notachieved (seeRifle Lesson 15(A1) or 16 (A2)),repeat Practice 1using the groupplus a further 15rounds.3. Once zero isconfirmed recordsettings using theSAC.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-21


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup.2. Record thegroup size.3. Compare withthe MPI achievedin the prone posi-tion and note anyrequirement toaim off.

3. Grouping 100 mFire Trench

5rounds

Figure 11 with 75mm x 100 mmwhite patch on ascreen

4. Grouping 100 mKneeling

Unsupported/Squatting

5rounds



5. Grouping 100 mSitting

Unsupported

5rounds



6. Grouping 100 mStanding

Unsupported

5rounds



Standards

LF0409. The group sizes that should be achieved are:

Check Group Size — 200 mm (150 mm if using SUSAT)Fire Trench — 200 mm (150 mm if using SUSAT)Kneeling Unsupported/Squatting — 250 mm (225 mm if using SUSAT)Sitting Unsupported — 250 mm (200 mm if using SUSAT)Standing Unsupported — 450 mm


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-22

RIFLE LF 5. — APPLICATION OF THE GROUP AT 100 METRES(ALL POSITIONS)


LF0501. Aim. To confirm that the soldier can apply his group to the centre of thetarget from all firing positions.

LF0502. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or with-out AMS), an ETR if converted to AMS, or a GR.


LF0504. Stores.

Normal range stores2 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 11 per firer

or1 x Figure 12d per firer (on AMS converted range)80 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-23

Standards

LF0508. The group sizes that should be achieved in the repeat practice are:

Prone — 200 mmSitting Unsupported — 250 mm (Desirable)

— 300 mm (Acceptable)Kneeling Unsupported/Squatting — 250 mm (Desirable)

— 350 mm (Acceptable)Standing Unsupported — 450 mm


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-24


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup at each tar-get.2. Discuss thegroups and posi-tion of the MPI,note any adjust-ments needed tothe POA.3. Record thegroup sizes.4. Repeat thepractice using thecorrected POA ifnecessary.

1. Grouping (Fired Twice)

100 mProne,Sitting

Unsupported

20rounds

1 x Figure 11 ona screenorAMS Figure 12d


100 mKneeling

Unsupported/Squatting,Standing

Unsupported

20rounds

As per Practice 1. As per Practice 1.


100 mSitting

Unsupported

20rounds



100 mStanding

Unsupported

20rounds


RIFLE LF 6. — SAT/DCCT – ELEMENTARY APPLICATION OF FIRE UPTO 300 METRES (ALL POSITIONS)


LF0601. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by deliberate fire fromthe prone, kneeling supported, kneeling unsupported/squatting and sitting unsup-ported positions.

LF0602. Conduct. If SAT/DCCT is not available the lesson may be conductedusing 5.56 mm ammunition on an ETR or CGR with AMS, or GR.


LF0604. Stores.


Normal range stores 1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle per firer at 100 metres1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle per firer at 200/300 metres

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200/300 metres34 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (if required)


a. SAT/DCCT operators are to introduce the effects of crosswinds intoPractices 5 and 6.

b. POA from LF5 and the effect of range and wind should be discussedbefore each practice.


Preliminaries


LF0607. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the rangesafety rules applicable to SAT/DCCT.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-25

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-26


1. Fire 5 roundsapplication.2. All shots are tobe signalled.3. Record thescore and note theappropriate POAon the shootingrecord card.

1. Deliberate 100 mProne

5rounds

Figure 12 on ascreenorAMS Figure 12d

2. Deliberate 100 mKneeling


5rounds



3. Deliberate 100 mSitting

Unsupported

5rounds




5rounds

Figure 11 on ascreenor AMS Figure 11


Scoring

LF0609. If this lesson is fired live, scores are to be recorded and announced at theconclusion of each practice.

Practices 1 to 5

Hits within the representative 760 mm circle ON the figure — 4 points

Hits within the representative 760 mm circle OFF the figure — 2 points

Hits within the representative 1.220 m circle — 1 point

Practice 6

Hits within the representative 1.220 m circle — 4 points

LF0610. If this lesson is fired live, all shots fired are to be signalled. As each shotarrives the target is lowered immediately, a spotting disc is to be placed into the shothole and the target raised without delay. The marker paddle is to be used to point outthe spotting disc’s position and indicate the appropriate score. When the next shot

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-27



Supported

5rounds


1. Fresh windL – R.2. Fire 5 roundsapplication.3. All shots are tobe signalled.4. Record thescore and note theappropriate POAon the shootingrecord card.


9rounds


1. Strong windR – L.2. Fire 9 roundsapplication.3. All shots are tobe signalled.4. Record thescore and note theappropriate POAon the shootingrecord card.

arrives the target is lowered immediately, the spotting disc moved to the latest shothole position, the previous shot hole is patched out and the target raised withoutdelay and so on. The suggested signals are:

4 points scored — White side of paddle positioned at the bottom right cornerof the screen.

2 points scored — White side of paddle positioned at the bottom centre ofthe screen.

1 point scored — White side of paddle positioned at the bottom left cornerof the screen.

Wash-out — Black side of paddle waved from side to side across theface of the screen, then indicate the direction of the missif known, using white side of paddle.

Standards

LF0611. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at eachfiring distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing dis-tance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firingdistances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are toundergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-28

Ser Range TotalRounds Iron Sight

% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement OMS Requirement

1 100 m 15 70% 42 75% 44 60

2

3

200 m

300 m

10

9

60%

33%

24

12

75%

33%

30

12

40

36

78 86 136

RIFLE LF 7. — ELEMENTARY APPLICATION OF FIRE UP TO300 METRES (ALL POSITIONS)


LF0701. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by deliberate fire fromthe prone, sitting unsupported, kneeling supported, kneeling unsupported/squatting,standing unsupported and fire trench positions.

LF0702. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR if con-verted to AMS, or a GR.

LF0703. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete all prac-tices. If AMS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings.

LF0704. Stores.

Normal range storesGallery Range1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 100 metres1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a1.220 m circle at 200/300 metres

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200/300 metres34 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-29

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-30




5rounds



Unsupported

5rounds



3. Deliberate 100 mStanding

Unsupported

5rounds




5rounds

Figure 11 on ascreenorAMS Figure 11


Scoring

LF0708. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each prac-tice.

Practices 1 to 5




Practice 6


LF0709. All shots fired are to be signalled. As each shot arrives the target is low-ered immediately, a spotting disc is to be placed into the shot hole and the targetraised without delay. The marker paddle is to be used to point out the spotting disc’sposition and indicate the appropriate score. When the next shot arrives the target islowered immediately, the spotting disc moved to the latest shot hole position, the pre-vious shot hole is patched out and the target raised without delay and so on. The sug-gested signals are:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-31



Supported

5rounds

Figure 11 on ascreenor

AMS Figure 11



9rounds






Wash-out — Black side of paddle waved from side to side across theface of the screen, then indicate the direction of the miss if known, using white side of paddle.

Standards

LF0710. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at eachfiring distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMS at any firingdistance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at thefiring distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who failare to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-32


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 100 m 15 70% 42 75% 44 60

2

3

200 m

300 m

10

9

60%

33%

24

12

75%

33%

30

12

40

36

78 86 136

RIFLE LF 8. — SAT/DCCT – ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE UPTO 300 METRES (ALL POSITIONS)


LF0801. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by snap and rapidshooting from the prone, sitting unsupported, standing unsupported, kneeling sup-ported and kneeling unsupported/squatting positions.

LF0802. Conduct. If SAT/DCCT is not available the lesson maybe conductedusing 5.56 mm ammunition, ideally on a CGR or an ETR converted for AMS.

LF0803. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.


LF0805. Stores.


Normal range stores1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 12d at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer42 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition (if required)

LF0806. Miscellaneous. SAT/DCCT operators are to introduce the effects ofcrosswinds into Practices 5 and 7.


Preliminaries


LF0808. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the rangesafety rules applicable to SAT/DCCT.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-33

Practice Details

LF0809. The practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-34


1. Fire in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

1. Snap 100 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 12orAMS Figure 12d.2. 5 x 6 secondexposures with 5second intervals.

2. Snap 100 mKneeling


5rounds



3. Snap 100 mStanding

Unsupported

5rounds



4. Snap 200 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 5 x 6 secondexposures with 5second intervals.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-35


5. Rapid 200 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 10 secondexposure

1. Strong windR– L. 2. Fire in thenominated posi-tion.3. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.4. Fire five roundsduring exposure.5. Targets up andhold.


Supported

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 5 x 6 secondexposures with 5second intervals.


7. Suppression 300 mProne

12rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 15 secondexposures with15 second inter-vals.

1. Fresh windL – R.2. Fire in thenominated posi-tion.3. Order “Watchand Shoot”.4. Fire up to threerounds at eachexposure.5. Targets fallwhen hit.6. HPS FORTHIS PRACTICEIS 4 – ONEPOINT PEREXPOSURE HIT.

ScoringLF0810. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice.

Practice 1 to 6 — One point per hit.

Practice 7 — One point per exposure hit (HPS of 4 for this practice)

StandardsLF0811. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at eachfiring distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing dis-tance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firingdistances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are toundergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-36


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 100 m 15 70% 10 75% 11 15

2

3

200 m

300 m

15

12

60%

33%

9

4

75%

33%

11

4

15

4

23 26 34

RIFLE LF 8 — TIME CHARTOne extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges,this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-37

Practice Range/Target Timings Remarks

Fall when hit.1 UP DOWN05 1217 2429 3641 4853 1:00

100 mFigure 12

2 100 mFigure 12

As for Practice 1. Fall when hit.

3 100 mFigure 12


4 200 mFigure 11


5 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 10

Up and hold.

7 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 2136 52

1:07 1:231:38 1:54

1. Fall when hit.2. Score one point foreach exposure hit.3. HPS for this prac-tice – 4.

6 200 mFigure 11


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-38

RIFLE LF 9. — ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE UP TO300 METRES (ALL POSITIONS)


LF0901. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by deliberate, snap andrapid shooting from the prone, sitting unsupported, standing unsupported, kneelingsupported, kneeling unsupported/squatting and fire trench positions.

LF0902. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideallyfitted with AMS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR.



LF0905. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 12d at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer55 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries

LF0906. Safety. Normal safety precautions


Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-39

realist

Highlight

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-40



1. Snap 100 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 12orAMS Figure 12d.2. 5 x 6 secondexposures withirregular intervals.



5rounds

1. Figure 12orAMS Figure 12d.2. 5 x 8 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to adoptthe nominatedposition and fireone round at eachexposure.4. Between expo-sures, order“Stand up, adoptthe standingalert position”.5. Targets fallwhen hit.

3. Snap/Rapid 100 mStanding

and KneelingUnsupported/

Squatting/Prone

10rounds

1. Figure 12orAMS Figure 12d.2. 2 x 14 secondexposures withan interval toallow all firers toadopt the stand-ing alert position.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. On the appear-ance of the targetthe firer is to fireone round stand-ing then adopt thekneeling unsup-ported/squatting orprone position andfire a further four

realist

Highlight

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-41


rounds at theexposure. 4. Firers mustadopt the standingalert positionbetween expo-sures.5. Targets up andhold.

3. Snap/Rapid(cont)

4. Snap 200 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 5 x 6 secondexposures withirregular intervals.


5. Snap/Rapid 200 mKneeling

Supported

5rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

200 mFire Trench

6. Rapid/Snap 10rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 10 secondexposure, fol-lowed 15 sec-onds later by 5 x6 second expo-sures with irregu-lar intervals.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 5 roundsat the first expo-sure.4. Target up andhold.5. After the firstexposure order“Stop, Watch andShoot”.

realist

Highlight

Scoring

LF0910. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice.

Practice 1 to 6 — One point per hit.

Practice 7 — One point per exposure hit (HPS of 5 for this practice)

Standards


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-42


6. Fire one roundat each remainingexposure.7. Targets fallwhen hit.

6. Rapid/Snap(cont)


15rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire up to threerounds at eachexposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.5. HPS FOR THISPRACTICE IS 5 –ONE POINT PEREXPOSURE HIT.

realist

Highlight

realist

Highlight


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-43


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 100 m 20 70% 14 75% 15 20

2

3

200 m

300 m

20

15

60%

33%

12

5

75%

33%

15

5

20

5

31 35 45

realist

Highlight


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-44


Fall when hit.1 UP DOWN05 1218 2529 3641 4851 58

100 mFigure 12

2 100 mFigure 12

UP DOWN05 14

1. Reset watch andrepeat 4 times.2. Fall when hit.

3 100 mFigure 12

UP DOWN05 20

1. Reset watch andrepeat once.2. Up and hold.

4 200 mFigure 11


5 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1218 2529 3641 4851 58

1. Fall when hit.

6 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 16

31 3844 5155 1:02

1:07 1.141:17 1:24

1. Up and hold.

2. Fall when hit.

7 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 2130 4651 1:07

1:14 1:301:38 1:54

1. Fall when hit.2. Score one point foreach exposure hit.3. HPS for practice– 5.

realist

Highlight

realist

Highlight

RIFLE LF 10. — ZEROING AT 100 METRES (PRONE) ANDGROUPING AT 100 METRES (OTHER POSITIONS)


LF1001. Aim. To superimpose the soldiers MPI onto the CZP and compare theMPI of groups fired from the kneeling unsupported/squatting, sitting unsupported,standing unsupported and fire trench positions and note any requirement to aim off.

LF1002. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or with-out AMS), an ETR if converted to AMS, or a GR.

LF1003. Timings. One detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete allpractices.

LF1004. Stores.


or1 x Figure 12d per firer (on AMS converted range)45 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (additional ammunition maybe required for reshoots)


a. Firers must achieve a 225 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone posi-tion at 100 metres during Practice 1 before their sights are adjusted.

b. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and soldiers (when applicable) are tobe fully conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle 5.56 mm Modified L85A2, Light Support WeaponModified L86A2 and Associated Equipments 2001 (Army Code No. 71753) orInfantry Training, Volume II, Pamphlet No. 6, 5.56 mm Rifle and Light SupportWeapon (Army Code No. 71374) relating to Zeroing.

c. Weapons must be collimated or boresighted before live firing commences.

d. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of theMPI from the CZP when firing from positions other than prone. Coaches are toemphasize the importance of this point to their firers.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-45


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-46


1. Fire 4 x 5round groups atthe same aimingmark.2. The firer is toapply his safetycatch, stand up,then re-adopt hisposition betweeneach group.3. Discuss thegroup and mea-sure the groupsize.4. Identify theMPI and adjust forzero if necessary.


20rounds


2. CheckGroup

100 mProne

5rounds


1. Fire a 5 roundcheck group toconfirm zero.2. If the correctzero is not ach-ieved (see RifleLesson 15 (A1) or16 (A2)), repeatPractice 1 usingthe group plus afurther 15 rounds.3. Once zeroingis confirmedrecord the settingsusing the SAC.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-47



3. Grouping 100 mFire Trench

5rounds


4. Grouping 100 mKneeling


5rounds



5. Grouping 100 mSitting

Unsupported

5rounds




Unsupported

5rounds



Standards


Check Group Size — 150 mmFire Trench — 150 mmKneeling Unsupported/Squatting — 225 mmSitting Unsupported — 200 mmStanding Unsupported — 450 mm


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-48

RIFLE LF 11. SAT/DCCT — ELEMENTARY APPLICATION OF FIRE UPTO 400 METRES (ALL POSITIONS)


LF1101. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by deliberate fire fromthe prone, kneeling supported, kneeling unsupported/squatting, fire trench positionand standing unsupported positions.

LF1102. Conduct. If SAT/DCCT is not available the lesson can be conductedusing 5.56 mm ammunition on an ETR or CGR (ideally with AMS) or GR.

LF1103. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete all prac-tices.

LF1104. Stores.


Normal range stores 1 x Figure 12 on a screen with 760 mm and 1.220 m inscribed circles at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 on a screen with 760 mm and 1.220 m inscribed circles at 200–400 metres per firer

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 12d at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200-400 metres per firer49 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (if required)

LF1105. Miscellaneous. SAT/DCCT operators are to introduce the effects ofcrosswinds into Practices 4 and 7.


Preliminaries


LF1107. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the rangesafety rules applicable SAT/DCCT.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-49

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-50




5rounds




5rounds



3. Deliberate 100 mStanding

Unsupported

5rounds




5rounds


1. Strong windL – R.2. Fire 5 roundsapplication.3. All shots are tobe signalled.4. Record thescore and note theappropriate POAon the shootingrecord card.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-51



5. Deliberate 200 mFire Trench

5rounds



Supported

5rounds




5rounds


1. Fresh windR – L.2. Fire 5 roundsapplication.3. All shots are tobe signalled.4. Record thescore and note theappropriate POAon the shootingrecord card.

8. Deliberate 300 mFire Trench

5rounds



Scoring


Practices 1 to 8




Practice 9


LF1110. If this lesson is fired live, all shots fired are to be signalled. As each shotarrives the target is lowered immediately, a spotting disc is to be placed into the shothole and the target raised without delay. The marker paddle is to be used to point outthe spotting disc’s position and indicate the appropriate score. When the next shotarrives the target is lowered immediately, the spotting disc moved to the latest shothole position, the previous shot hole is patched out and the target raised withoutdelay and so on. The suggested signals are:



1 point scored — White side of paddle positioned at the bottom left corner of the screen.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-52



9rounds



Wash-out — Black side of paddle waved from side to side across the face of the screen, then indicate the direction of the miss if known, using white side of paddle.

Standards



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-53

Ser Range TotalRounds SUSAT

% HitsSUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 15 75% 44 60

2

3

200 m

300 m

15

10

75%

60%

44

24

60

40

12 364 400 m 9 33%

124 196

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-54

RIFLE LF 12. — ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE UP TO400 METRES (ALL POSITIONS)


LF1201. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by snap and rapid firefrom the prone, sitting unsupported, kneeling supported, kneeling unsupported/squat-ting, standing unsupported and fire trench positions.

LF12302. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideal-ly converted for AMS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR.


LF1204. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 50 minutes to complete allpractices. If AMS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings of the shoot.

LF1205. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200–400 metres per firer

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 12d at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200-400 metres per firer52 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-55

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-56


1. Rapid 100 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 12orAMS Figure 12d.2. 1 x 12 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 5 roundsat the exposure.4. Target up andhold.

2. Snap/Rapid 100 mStanding

andKneeling

Unsupported/Squatting/

Prone

10rounds

1. Figure 12orAMS Figure 12d.2. 2 x 14 secondexposures withan interval toallow all firers toadopt the stand-ing alert position.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. On the appear-ance of the targetthe firer is to fireone round stand-ing then adopteither the kneelingunsupported/squatting or prone posi-tion and fire a fur-ther four rounds atthe exposure.4. Firer mustadopt the standingalert positionbetween expo-sures.5. Targets up andhold.

3. Rapid/Snap 200 mProne

10rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 15 secondexposure fol-lowed 15 sec-onds later by 5 x6 second expo-sures with inter-

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, 5m to therear of the firingpoint, loaded,ready.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch out”.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-57


3. Rapid/Snap(cont)

vals of 5-10 sec-onds.

3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion and fire 5rounds at theexposure.4. Target up andhold.5. After the firstexposure order“Stop, Watch andShoot”.6. Fire one roundat each remainingexposure.7. Targets fallwhen hit.


Supported

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 5 x 10 secondexposures withirregular intervalsbetween expo-sures.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, 5 m tothe rear of the fir-ing point, loaded,ready.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thekneeling support-ed position andfire one round ateach exposure.4. Between expo-sures order“Apply safety catches,stand up, dressback 5 m, adopt

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-58


4. Snap(cont)

the standingalert position”.5. Targets fallwhen hit.

5. Snap 300 mFire Trench

5rounds



6. Snap 300 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 8 secondexposure fol-lowed 5 secondslater by 4 x 5 sec-ond exposureswith irregularintervals ofbetween 5–10seconds.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, 5 mbehind the firingpoint, loaded,ready.2. Order “Watchout“.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion and fire oneround at eachexposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.


12rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 15 secondexposures with15 second inter-vals.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire up to 3rounds at eachexposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

Scoring

LF1209. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice:

Practices 1 – 6 — One point per hit.

Practice 7 — One point per exposure hit (HPS of 4 for this practice).

Standards



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-59


7. Suppression(cont)

5. HPS FORTHIS PRACTICEIS 4 — ONEPOINT PEREXPOSURE HIT.


% HitsSUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 15 75% 11 15

2

3

200 m

300 m

15

10

75%

60%

11

6

15

10

4 44 400 m 12 33%

32 44


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-60


1 100 mFigure 12

UP DOWN05 18

Up and hold.

100 mFigure 12

UP DOWN05 20


200 mFigure 11

4 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 16

1. Reset watch andrepeat four times.2. Fall when hit.

5 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1117 2327 3338 4447 53

Fall when hit.

6 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1419 2534 4045 5158 1:04

Fall when hit.

7 400 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 2136 52

1:07 1:231:38 1:54

1. Fall when hit.2. Score one pointfor each exposurehit.3. HPS for this prac-tice – 4.

3

2

UP DOWN05 10

36 4352 59

1.04 1.111.18 1.251.31 1.38

1. Up and hold.

2. Fall when hit.

RIFLE LF 13. — FURTHER ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE UP TO400 METRES (ALL POSITIONS)


LF1301. Aim. To give the soldier further practise in engaging targets by snap andrapid shooting from the prone, sitting unsupported, standing unsupported, kneelingsupported, kneeling unsupported/squatting and fire trench positions.

LF1302. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideallyconverted for AMS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR.



LF1305. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200-400 metres per firer

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 12d at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200-400 metres per firer57 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-61

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-62


1. Snap 100 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 12or AMS Figure 12d.2. 5 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets do notfall when hit.


Unsupported

5rounds

1. Figure 12or AMS Figure 12d.2. 5 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervals.


3. Snap/Rapid 200 mKneeling

Supported

1. Figure 11or AMS Figure 11.2. 5 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervals,followed 15 sec-onds later by 1 x10 second expo-sure.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.5. After the 5thexposure order“Stop, 5 roundsrapid, Watch andShoot”.6. Fire 5 roundsat the exposure.7. Target up andhold.

10rounds

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-63


4. Rapid 200 mFire Trench

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 10 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion, loaded,ready.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.3. Fire five roundsat the exposure.4. Target up andhold.

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 5 x 8 secondexposures withirregular intervalsbetween expo-sures.


Supported

5rounds

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, 5 m tothe rear of the fir-ing point, loaded,ready.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thekneeling support-ed position andfire one round atthe exposure.4. Betweenexposures order“Apply safetycatches, standup, dress back 5m, adopt thestanding alertposition”.5. Targets fallwhen hit.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-64





5rounds

7. Snap 300 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 8 secondexposure fol-lowed 5 secondslater by 4 x 4 sec-ond exposureswith intervals ofbetween 5 and 10seconds betweenexposures.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition 5 m to therear of the firingpoint, loaded,ready.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion and fire oneround at eachexposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

8. Rapid 300 mProne

5rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 5 roundsat the exposure.4. Target up andhold.

Scoring


Practices 1 to 8 — One point per hit.

Practice 9 — One point per exposure hit (HPS of 4 for this practice).

Standards


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-65



12rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire up to 3rounds at eachexposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.5. HPS FORTHIS PRACTICEIS 4 — ONEPOINT PEREXPOSURE HIT.


% HitsSUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 10 75% 7 10

2

3

200 m

300 m

20

15

75%

60%

15

9

20

15

4 44 400 m 12 33%

35 49


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-66

RIFLE LF 13 — TIME CHART

One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges,this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-67



100 mFigure 12

2 100 mFigure 12


3 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1017 2226 3137 4247 52

1:07 1:18

1. Fall when hit.

2. Up and hold.

4 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 16 Up and hold.

5 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 14

1. Reset watch andrepeat four times.2. Fall when hit.

6 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1118 2428 3440 4651 57

Fall when hit.

300 mFigure 11

7 UP DOWN05 1419 2433 3843 4855 1:00

Fall when hit.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-68


Up and hold.8 UP DOWN05 16

300 mFigure 11

9 400 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 2130 4651 1:07

1:14 1:30

1. Fall when hit.2. Score one point foreach exposure hit.3. HPS FOR THISPRACTICE – 4.

RIFLE APWT(CI) AND APWA(CI)


APWT0101. Firing Requirement.

a. APWT(CI). Rifle APWT(CI) is to be fired by all Infantry soldiers duringInfantry Phase 2 Training and is to be fired annually by all combat infantrymenand RLC Soldier Pioneer Support personnel whose personal weapon is theRifle.

b. APWA(CI). Practices 2, 4, 7, 9 and 10 of Rifle APWT(CI) are to be firedannually by all combat infantrymen whose personal weapon is the LMG or thePistol.

APWT0102. Ranges. Rifle APWT(CI)/APWA(CI) can be fired on an ETR, GR orCGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to AMS the firing point monitorsare to be positioned where the firers cannot view them.

APWT0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to completeall practices.

APWT0104. Rules.

a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt orderwebbing, combat helmet, combat body armour (where issued) and issued, ser-viceable hearing protection.

b. No extra time will be given for stoppages.

c. Coaching and signalling are not permitted.

d. SUSAT only is to be used.

e. If fire trenches are not available, the prone position is to be used.

f. The ammunition allocation for the APWA includes 20 rounds for registra-tion, from which 5 rounds are to be fired at each range prior to the test shoot.

APWT0105. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.

APWT0106. Ammunition.

a. APWT(CI) — 75 rounds.

b. APWA(CI) — 70 rounds.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-69

APWT0107. Scoring. One point per hit, except in Practice 10 where the scoringis one point per successful engagement of each exposure.

APWT0108. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achievethe OMS at each firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve theOMS at any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only thepractices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again.Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weak-ness, before re-testing.

a. APWT(CI).

Marksman (Combat Infantryman). To qualify for Marksman all practicesare to be completed and the firer must achieve a score of 55 (85%) or moreof the total HPS (65) for the entire shoot. Infantry soldiers who qualify asMarksmen during the CIC are entitled to retain the award on joining theirunits. Soldiers who qualify as Marksmen are entitled to wear the Marksmanbadge for one year before they must requalify.

b. APWA(CI).

c. Whilst it is not mandatory for firers to qualify at each firing distance on thesame day, the entire AWA should be successfully completed within a sensibletime frame.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-70

Ser Range TotalRounds

% Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 20 75% 15 20

2

3

200 m

300 m

20

20

75%

60%

15

12

20

20

4 400 m 15 33% 5 5


% Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 10 60% 6 10

2

3

200 m

300 m

10

15

50%

40%

5

6

10

15

4 400 m 15 33% 5 5


Preliminaries

APWT0109. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

APWT0110. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Practice Details

APWT0111. Practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-71


1. Rapid 100 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 12.2. 5 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

1. Firers in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat the exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

2. Snap/Rapid 100 mStanding and

KneelingUnsupported/

Squatting/Prone

10rounds

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. On the appear-ance of the target,the firer is to fireone round stand-ing then adopteither the kneelingunsupported/squatting or proneposition and fire afurther 4 rounds atthe exposure.

1. Figure 12.2. 2 x 12 secondexposures withan interval toallow all firers toadopt the stand-ing alert position.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-72


1. Figure 11.2. 5 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervals,followed 15 sec-onds later by 1 x10 second expo-sure.


Unsupported

5rounds



1. Figure 11.2. 5 x 8 secondexposures withirregular intervalsbetween expo-sures.

2. Snap/Rapid(cont)

4. Firers mustadopt the standingalert position bet-ween exposures.5. Targets up andhold.

4. Snap/Rapid 200 mProne

10rounds

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.5. After the fifthexposure order“Stop, 5 roundsrapid, Watch andShoot”.6. Fire 5 rounds atthe exposure.7. Targets up andhold.


Supported

5rounds

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, 5 m torear of the firingpoint, loaded,ready.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the target

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-73


5. Snap (cont) is the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thekneeling support-ed position andfire one round ateach exposure.4. Between expo-sures, order“Apply safetycatches, standup, dress back 5m, adopt thestanding alertposition”.5. Targets fallwhen hit.


5rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 1 x 10 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 5 rounds atthe exposure.4. Targets up andhold.


5rounds



8. Snap 300 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 1 x 8 secondexposure fol-lowed 5 seconds

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, 5 m tothe rear of the fir-

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-74


8. Snap (cont) later by 4 x 4 sec-ond exposureswith intervals of5-10 secondsbetween expo-sures.

ing point, loaded,ready.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion and fire oneround at eachexposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

10rounds

9. Rapid/Snap 300 mProne

1. Figure 11.2. 1 x 15 secondexposure fol-lowed 10 sec-onds later by 5 x4 second expo-sures with inter-vals of 5-10 sec-onds betweenexposures.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, 5 m tothe rear of the fir-ing point, loaded,ready.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch out”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion and fire 5rounds at theexposure.4. Targets up andhold.5. After the firstexposure order“Stop, Watch andShoot”.6. Fire one roundat each of theremaining expo-sures.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-75


9. Rapid/Snap(cont)

7. Targets fallwhen hit.

15rounds

10.Suppression

400 mProne


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire up to 3rounds at eachexposure.4.Targets fallwhen hit.5. HPS FOR THISPRACTICE IS 5— ONE POINTPER EXPOSUREHIT.

RIFLE APWT (CI) — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-76



2 UP DOWN05 18

100 mFigure 12

3 100 mFigure 12


4 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1017 2226 3137 4247 52

1:07 1:18

1. Fall when hit.

2. Up and hold.5 200 m

Figure 11UP DOWN05 14


8 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1419 2433 3845 5058 1:03

Fall when hit.

1 100 mFigure 12

UP DOWN05 1017 2226 3137 4247 52

Fall when hit.

6 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 16

Up and hold.

7 300 mFigure 11


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-77


9 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 21

31 3645 5057 1:02

1:10 1:151:20 1:25

1. Up and hold.

2. Fall when hit.

10 400 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 2130 4651 1:07

1:14 1:301:38 1:54

1. Fall when hit.2. Score one point foreach exposure hit.3. HPS FOR THISPRACTICE = 5.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-78

RIFLE APWT(TS)/APWA (OA&SVCS)



a. APWT(TS). Rifle APWT(TS) is to be fired by all soldiers during Phase 1Other Arms Recruit Training and is to be fired annually thereafter by all OtherArms and Service personnel whose personal weapon is the Rifle.

b. APWA (OA&SVCS). Practices 3, 4, 5 and 7 may be fired by OA&Svcssoldiers who have been allocated the rifle as an alternate personal weapon.

APWT0202. Ranges. Rifle APWT(TS) can be fired on an ETR, GR, CGR orBaffled Range. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to Automatic MarkingSystem (AMS) the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers cannotview them.


APWT0204. Rules.

a The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order web-bing, combat helmet, combat body armour (where issued) and issued, service-able hearing protection.



d. Iron Sight only is to be used except for Other Arms and Services soldierswhose personal weapon is the Rifle with SUSAT.


APWT0205. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.

APWT0206. Ammunition. APWT (TS) 55 rounds, APWA(OA&Svcs) 50 rounds(incl 5 sighters at each firing distance).

APWT0207. Scoring. One point per hit, except in Practice 7 where the scoring isone point per successful engagement of each exposure.

APWT0208. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer mustachieve the OMS at each firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure toachieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, how-ever, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-79

be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for theareas of weakness, before re-testing.

a. APWT(TS).

Marksman. To qualify for Marksman all practices are to be completedand the firer must achieve a score of 36 (80%) with Iron Sights or 40 (90%)with SUSAT, or more of the total HPS (45) for the entire shoot. Other Armsand Services soldiers who qualify as Marksmen at the end of All ArmsPhase 1 Recruit Training are entitled to retain the award on joining theirunits. Soldiers who qualify as Marksmen are entitled to wear the Marksmanbadge for one year before they must requalify.

b. APWA(TS).

c. Whilst it is not mandatory for firers to qualify at each firing distance on thesame day, the entire AWA should be successfully completed within a sensibletime frame.


Preliminaries



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-80


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 100 m 20 70% 14 75% 15 20

2

3

200 m

300 m

20

15

60%

33%

12

5

75%

33%

15

5

20

5


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 100 m 10 60% 6 70% 7 10

2

3

200 m

300 m

10

15

50%

33%

5

5

60%

33%

6

5

10

5

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-81


100 mProne

1. Snap 5rounds





5rounds


1. Firers in thestanding alert posi-tion.2. Order “Watchoutx”.3. On the appear-ance of the target,the firer is toadopt the kneelingunsupported orsquatting positionand fire oneround at eachexposure.4. Between expo-sures, order“Stand up andadopt the stand-ing alert posi-tion”.5. Targets fallwhen hit.

10rounds

3. Snap/Rapid 100mStanding and

KneelingUnsupported/

Squatting/Prone

1. Figure 12.2. 2 x 12 secondexposures withan interval toallow all firers toadopt the stand-ing alert position.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. On the appear-ance of the target,the firer is to fireone round stand-

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-82



Supported

5rounds



4. Snap 200 mProne


5rounds


3. Snap/Rapid(cont)

ing then adopt thekneeling unsup-ported/squatting orprone position andfire a further 4rounds at theexposure.4. Firers mustadopt the standingalert positionbetween expo-sures.5. Targets up andhold.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 5 rounds atthe first exposure.4. Target up andhold.

6. Rapid/Snap 200 mFire Trench

10rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 1 x 12 secondexposure, fol-lowed 15 sec-onds later by 5 x6 second expo-sures with irregu-lar intervals.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-83



15rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire up to 3rounds at eachexposure.4.Targets fallwhen hit.5. HPS FOR THISPRACTICE IS 5— ONE POINTPER EXPOSUREHIT.

6. Snap/Rapid(cont)

5. After the firstexposure, order“Stop, Watch andShoot”.6. Fire one roundat each of theremaining expo-sures.7. Targets fallwhen hit.

RIFLE APWT (TS) — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-84



100 mFigure 12

2 100 mFigure 12

UP DOWN05 12


3 100 mFigure 12

UP DOWN05 18


4 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1219 2630 3743 5055 1:02

Fall when hit.

5 200 mFigure 11


6 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 16

31 3845 5256 1:03

1:09 1:161:21 1:28

1. Up and hold.

2. Fall when hit.

7 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 2130 4651 1:07

1:14 1:301:38 1:54

1. Fall when hit.2. Score one point foreach exposure hit.3. HPS FOR THISPRACTICE = 5.

NAVY APWT(NAPWT)


NAPWT0101. Firing Requirement.

a. NAPWT. Rifle NAPWT is to be fired by all RN personnel during initialtraining and is to be fired annually by all RN personnel whose personal weaponis the Rifle.

b. NAPWT(Ships Protection Organisation (SPO) only). Rifle NAPWT (SPOonly) is to be fired annually by all RN personnel whose personal weapon is therifle and who have been designated as part of the SPO.

NAPWT0102. Ranges. Rifle NAPWT can be fired on an ETR, GR or CGR. (Inextreme circumstances the NAPWT may be fired on a 25 metre range providingscaled down targets are used.) Where the test is fired on ranges converted to AMSthe firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them.

NAPWT0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to com-plete all practices.

NAPWT0104. Rules.

a. The dress and equipment is to be combat dress, belt order webbing andissued, serviceable hearing protection.



NAPWT0105. Ammunition.

a. NAPWT — 55 rounds.

b. NAPWT (SPO only) — 65 rounds.

NAPWT0106. Scoring. One point per hit.

NAPWT0107. Standards.

a. NAPWT.

HPS — 55

Marksman — 49

Pass — 33

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-85

b. NAPWT (SPO only).

HPS — 65

Marksman — 58

Pass — 39


Preliminaries

NAPWT0108. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

NAPWT0109. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Practice Details

NAPWT0110. Practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-86


100 mStanding

Supported

1. Deliberate 5rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 5 x 6 secondexposures withintervals of 5 sec-onds.

1. Order positionto be adopted.2. One round ateach exposure.3. Targets fallwhen hit.4. Order “Watchand Shoot”.5. Firers return tothe Alert positionbetween expo-sures.

2. Rapid 100 mKneeling

Supported

10rounds

1. Figure 11.2. One exposureof 35 seconds.

1. Order positionto be adopted.2. Targets up andhold.3. Order “10rounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-87


100 mStanding/Kneeling

Supported

3. Snap 10rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 5 double expo-sures of 6 sec-onds (down for 5seconds and upfor 6 seconds)with irregularintervals of 5 to10 secondsbetween doubleexposures.

1. Firers inStanding Alertposition.2. Targets fallwhen hit.3. One round ateach exposure.4. Order “Watchand Shoot”.5. On appearanceof the first expo-sure fire oneround. Adopt theKneelingSupported positionand fire a furtherone round at thefollowing expo-sure. Firers returnto the StandingAlert positionbetween doubleexposures.

4. Snap 100 mKneeling/Squatting

Unsupported

10rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 5 x 10 secondexposures withirregular intervalsof 5 to 10 sec-onds betweenexposures.

1. Order positionto be adopted.2. Two rounds ateach exposure.3. Targets up andhold.4. Order “Watchand Shoot”.5. Firers return tothe Standing Alertposition betweenexposures.


Supported

10rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 5 x doubleexposures.3. At each doubleexposure the tar-gets are up for 10seconds, downfor 4 seconds, up

1. Firers inStanding Alertposition, loadedand made ready.2. Order “WatchOut”.3. The appear-ance of the first

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-88


5. Snap(cont)

for 6 seconds. target is the signalto move onto theFP, adopt theKneelingSupported positionand fire one roundat each exposure.4. Between doubleexposuresorder“ApplySafety Catches,Stand Up, Adoptthe StandingAlert Position”.5. Targets fallwhen hit.

6. Snap/Rapid 100 mProne

Unsupported

10rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 5 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervals,followed by a 15second intervalsand 1 x 15 sec-ond exposure.

1. Firers in nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.5. After fifth expo-sure order “Stop,5 Rounds Rapid,Watch andShoot”.6. Fire 5 rounds atthe exposure.7. Targets up andhold.

7. SPOMembers onlySnap

100 mStanding and

KneelingSupported

10rounds

1. Figure 11.2. 5 x doubleexposures.3. At each doubleexposure the tar-gets are up for 8seconds, downfor 5 seconds, upfor 6 seconds.

1. After the orderload make ready,order “GroundArms”, then“Gas, Gas, Gas”.2. Firers are thento dress back 5metres to rear ofthe firing point andadopt the Standing

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 3-89


7. Snap(cont)

Alert positionwearing respiratorand safety catchapplied.3. Order “WatchOut”.4. The appear-ance of the firsttarget is the signalto move onto theFP, adopt theStandingSupported positionand fire one roundat the exposure.On completionadopt the Kneelingposition, fire a fur-ther round at thesecond exposure.5. Firers applysafety catch andreturn to theStanding Alertposition. Orderdress back 5metres to the rearof the pointbetween doubleexposures.6. All targets willfall when hit.7. Fire one roundat each exposure.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED3-90

Chapter 4

THE LIGHT SUPPORT WEAPON (LSW)

Scope

0401. Chapter 4 sets out all LSW live fir-ing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMTStages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the BattleShot. It includes the application of lessonsto all Arms and Services and the progres-sion and frequency with which they are tobe fired.

0402. This progression and frequency of fir-ing is essential for preparing soldiers forLSW Annual Personal Weapon Tests(APWT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essentialin preparing the firer for mandatory TLFTTand LFTT. The actual detail of TLFTT andLFTT is in Chapters 6 and 7 respectively.


0403. Small Arms Trainer (SAT) andDismounted Close Combat Trainer(DCCT). SAT or DCCT LF lessons are anintegral part of Training the Battle Shot andhave been selected, where appropriate, toconfirm the basic skills in each Stagebefore live firing and to enable the coach to eliminate faults which have hitherto onlybeen detectable during live firing. All LSW LF lessons and AWAs are included in theSAT/DCCT software and can be used for practices, remedial training or as concur-rent activity to a range or other period. (The SAT or DCCT cannot be used as a sub-stitute for live firing of any Annual Weapon Test or Assessment.)

0404. Automatic Marking System (AMS). Vital shooting and coaching informa-tion can be gained, and time, manpower and ammunition saved, by the correct useof AMS. It permits Grouping, Zeroing and Elementary Application of Fire lessons tobe conducted on Electric Target Ranges (ETR) and Converted Gallery Ranges(CGR) without using butt markers or screen targets. In Advanced Application of Firelessons, AMS can be used to indicate to the firer and coach where shots are hittingor missing the target. RCOs are to ensure their coaches are thoroughly familiar withAMS before any LF lesson begins. All LF lessons are contained in AMS software.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-1

CONTENTS

SCOPE 4-1




SAFETY 4-5




WHTs 4-9

LF LESSON 1 4-15LF LESSON 2 4-17LF LESSON 3 4-21LF LESSON 4 4-25LF LESSON 5 4-31LF LESSON 6 4-35LF LESSON 7 4-41LF LESSON 8 4-45

APWT/APWA (CI) 4-53

APWT/APWA (OA & SVCS) 4-65

Where the targetry differs because of AMS, the difference is highlighted in the rele-vant lesson(s).


Aids to Training and Firing

0406. Bipod. The LSW is to be fired from the bipod except in the specific cir-cumstances set out in this volume. Although there is commonality of certain partswith the Rifle, the LSW is not designed to be fired in the same way as the Rifle andis to be used in the manner for which it was designed — as a weapon fired using theintegral bipod.

0407. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). To avoid wasting time and ammunition theSAC is to be used to reduce excessive displacement between the Mean Point ofImpact (MPI) and the Correct Zero Position (CZP) before zeroing. When LSWs havebeen zeroed, the SAC is to be used to record the PZP readings. Thereafter, SAC isto be used before any LF lesson to ensure that boresight readings have not changed.To save range time it is recommended that boresighting is conducted on the day priorto the lesson.

0408. Ammunition. All LSW LF lessons from LFMT Stage 2 onwards are to beconducted using 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition unless range orders or local restrictions(especially a tracer ban) preclude its use.

0409. Sandbags. The use of sandbags for support while shooting is no longerpermissible during any lessons or tests in LFMT or TLFTT.

Training and Firing Sequence

0410. The Combat Infantryman’s Course (CIC). The following LF lessons areto be fired by all Infantry soldiers during the CIC:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-2

LSW LFLesson No Content Page No


1 Introductory Shoot at 25 metres (Prone) 4-15 to 4-16

2 Zeroing and Grouping at 100 metres 4-17 to 4-19

3 Application of the Group at 100 metres 4-21 to 4-23

0411. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and TA Units — Initial Training. The fol-lowing LF lessons are to be fired, initially, by all combat infantrymen whose personalweapon is to be the LSW:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-3






4 Elementary Application of Fire 200 – 400metres 4-25 to 4-29

6 Advanced Application of Fire 100 – 400metres 4-35 to 4-40








0412. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and TA Units — Annual Training. Thefollowing LF lessons are to be fired, annually, after the initial training stipulated inparagraph 0411, by all combat infantrymen whose personal weapon is the LSW:

0413. Other Arms and Services Personnel, Regular and TA Units — InitialTraining. The following LF lessons are to be fired, initially, by all Other Arms andServices personnel whose personal weapon is to be the LSW:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-4



1 Introductory Shoot at 25 metres (Prone) 4-15 to 4-16








7

8

Advanced Application of Fire 400 – 600metres Advanced Application of Fire 100 – 600 metres

4-41 to 4-44

4-45 to 4-52

0414. Other Arms and Services Personnel, Regular and TA Units — AnnualTraining. The following LF lessons are to be fired annually, after the initial trainingstipulated in paragraph 0413, by all Other Arms and Services personnel whose per-sonal weapon is the LSW:

0415. Remedial Training. SAT/DCCT and AMS provide invaluable aids to theremedial training of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facil-ities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use oflive firing. All LSW LF lessons can be fired on SAT/DCCT and may be used as aremedial aid or as a rehearsal prior to firing on the open range.

Safety0416. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed a safety test prior to their firstlive firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conductingofficers must confirm that all soldiers firing any weapon for the first time have com-pleted the relevant WHTs prior to firing.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-5















LSW complete to CES 1 per soldierCleaning material As requiredIssued, serviceable hearing protection 1 per soldierCombat Helmets 1 per soldierCBA (where issued) 1 per soldierPersonal Shooting Record Card (AF B6994A/B) 1 per soldierCoach’s Aide Memoire (AF B71158) 1 per coachBinoculars 1 per coachFirst aid kit CompleteSAC As requiredStop watches As required

0419. Dress. Dress for LSW LF lessons should include belt order webbing.Combat helmets and CBA (where issued) are to be worn for all SAT and LF lessons.Practices that include NBC are to be fired in a minimum of respirator and NBCgloves.


0421. SAC. The SAC is to be used to boresight the LSW prior to firing a group-ing practice. Once zeroed, the PZP reading from SAC is to be noted in the firers’shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future LF lesson.The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on SAT.


a. Where possible, LSWs are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to therange, to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those thatmay be experienced on the range.

b. Check each soldier has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and hisshooting record card in his possession.

c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. Duringgrouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the cor-rect point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-6

0423. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be the bot-tom centre of the patch.

0424. Coaching. Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle5.56 mm Modified L85A2, Light Support Weapon Modified L86A2 and AssociatedEquipments (Army Code No. 71753) and Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pamphlet No. 6, The 5.56 mm Rifle and Light Support Weapon (LSW), (Army CodeNo. 71374) contain full detail of coaching requirements. Some essential points toensure are:

a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior knowl-edge of coaching techniques.


c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300.Soldiers are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing at ranges beyond300 metres.


e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary andadvanced application of fire lessons.

0425. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches togain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detailshould be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot orburst. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firersare given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.



0428. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the followingdrills are to be completed once the range has been cleared:



c. Pack kit.

d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, forecastof the next LSW LF lesson.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-7




a. LSW. Due to the similiarity between Rifle and LSW once a pass isachieved in WHTs for one, testing on the other is unnecessary, therefore sol-diers whose personal weapon is the rifle and alternate personal weapon is theLSW are to be tested on their personal weapon only. Soldiers whose person-al weapon is the LSW are to be tested in the bipod supported position for Tests4, 5 and 6. All tests are to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a quali-fied, current and competent instructor. Standards are to be measured:

(1) At appropriate stages during Other Arms Phase 1 Recruit Trainingand on its completion.

(2) At appropriate stages during the Combat Infantryman’s Course(CIC) and on its completion.

(3) Every six months in regular and TA units.

(4) Annually if the LSW is an alternate personal weapon to the Pistol.









RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-8

0434. Training Performance Standards. The Training Performance Standardsto be achieved for the LSW are:

WHTs LSW

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-9

LSW As Personal Weapon Skilled

LWS As Alternate Personal Weapon to Pistol Average


1 Safety LSW loaded.Safety Catchat ‘F’, changelever at ‘R’.Weapon lyingon theground.

1. Order the soldier to fetchthe weapon. The soldier,without further direction, isto:

a. Pick up the weapon, putthe safety catch to ‘S’. b. Remove the magazineand check that the cham-ber is clear.

2. Order the soldier to handover the weapon. The sol-dier is to:

a. Point the muzzle in asafe direction, check thatthe safety catch is at ‘S’and the change lever to‘R’, cock the weapon,depress the holding opencatch, show the weapon isclear and ease springs.


1. Order the soldier to stripthe Rifle as for daily clean-ing. Ask the following ques-tions:

a. What size flannelette isused to clean the barrel?b. What size flannelette isused to oil the barrel?c. What are the differ-ences to normal daily

LSW withsling fitted,unloaded,cleaning roll(with combi-nation toolout), flan-nelette andoil.


1. Standard:Skilled — Nomistakes. Average — 1to 3 mistakes.Fail — morethan 3 mis-takes.2. Award noqualification if

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-10


2(cont)

any mistakeaffects safety.

cleaning when in the fol-lowing conditions?(choose any 2 conditions)

(1) Heavy rain and dampconditions.(2) Dry, sandy or dustyconditions.(3) Cold and extremecold conditions.(4) Hot, wet conditions.

2. Order the soldier to indi-cate the parts of the combi-nation tool that are used toclean the gas plug andcylinder.3. Order the soldier toassemble the Rifle/LSW andtest the functioning of theweapon.

3 MagazineFilling

30 rounds,magazine,stopwatch.

On the command “Go” thesoldier fills his magazinewith 30 rounds by hand.

Instructor’s Note: Leavemagazines filled.

Standard:Skilled — 60seconds orless.Average — 61to 75 seconds.Fail — Over 75seconds.

4 Loading –ProneBipodSupportedPosition

LSW, one fullmagazine infastenedpouch.

Give the command “Load”.Pouches must be refas-tened.

1. The soldieris to be toldthat no timelimit is imposedbut that allactions shouldbe carried outquickly andcorrectly.2. Standard:Skilled — Allactions correct.Average — 1or 2 mistakes.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-11


Instructor’s Note: Leaveweapon loaded for Test No5.

4(cont)

Fail — Morethan 2 mis-takes.3. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

5 IA andStoppages

LSW loaded(from Test No4), represen-tative targets.

1. The actionstested arethose relatingto the IA andstoppages only.2. The soldieris to be toldthat no timelimit is imposedbut that allactions shouldbe carried outquickly andcorrectly.3. Standard:Skilled — Allactions correct.Average — 1or 2 mistakes.Fail — Morethan 2 mis-takes.4. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

1. Order“Down–ready–test andadjust–rapid fire”.2. Order “Gun firingalright–gun stops”. Soldieris to carry out theIA…“Cocking handle fullyforward”. Soldier is to tapforward cocking handle andcontinue firing.3. Order “Gun firingalright–gun stops”. Soldieris to carry out theIA…“Cocking handle fullyforward”. Soldier is to tapforward cocking handle andcontinue firing “Gun stillfails to fire”.4. On examination of bodyand chamber order“Rounds in magazine-chamber clear”. Allow sol-dier to complete the drill andfire.5. Order “Gun fires one ortwo rounds and stopsagain”.Once the soldier hascarried out the IA order“Cocking handle fully for-ward”. Soldier is to tap for-ward cocking handle andcontinue firing “Gun stillfails to fire”. On examina-tion of body and chamberorder“Rounds in the mag-azine-chamber clear”.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-12


5(cont)

Note: The test is not com-plete until the safety catch isset at ‘F’, the weapon re-aimed and the trigger oper-ated.6. Order “Stop”.

6 Unloading LSW loadedand ready(from Test No5)

This test follows on fromTest No 5. Give the com-mand “Unload”. The test isnot complete until the sol-dier has recovered theejected round, replaced it inthe magazine and fastenedthe pouch.


7 Basic WindTables

LSW, figuretargets (repre-sentative tar-gets can beused)

Ask the soldier to indicatetwo different points of aimby asking him one questionfrom each of the sectionsbelow. Allow him to use amap pin and figure target toindicate his answer.SECTION Aa. Fresh Wind L to R.Target Distance — 200 m.b. Strong Wind R to L.Target Distance — 200 m.

Standard:Skilled — Allcorrect.Average — 1correct answer.Fail — Lessthan 1 correctanswer.

LF Lessons 1 – 8

0435. The details of LF Lessons 1 – 8 are contained in the remaining pages of thischapter. Each lesson is contained in separate pages for easy use.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-13


7(cont)

SECTION Ba. Strong Wind L to R.Target Distance — 300 m.b. Fresh Wind R to L.Target Distance — 300 m.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-14

LSW LF 1. — INTRODUCTORY SHOOT AT 25 METRES (PRONE)


LF0101. Aim. To confirm that the soldier knows how to prepare the LSW for fir-ing. Then by firing single shots and controlled bursts, confirm that the soldier can aim,hold and fire the weapon. Finally, to confirm that he knows how to clean the LSWafter firing.

LF0102. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETRwith screens placed 25 metres from the firers.


LF0104. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x sheet of talc per coach1 x non permanent marker pen per coach1 x witness screen per firer each with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks34 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries


LF0106. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Preparation for Firing

LF0107. Explain that the procedures for preparing the LSW for firing and cleaningafter firing are the same as for the rifle.

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-15

Standards

LF0109. The average group sizes that should be achieved are:

Practice 1 — 40 mm

Practice 2 — 75 mm (Desirable)— 100 mm (Acceptable)


LF0110. Cleaning after Firing. Confirm Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling.

LF0111. Confirmation. Confirm by practice. Rifles are to be inspected and leftlightly oiled.

LF0112. Care after Cleaning. Remind: Under normal circumstances the bore,chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and re-oiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the rifle has been fired.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-16


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup at eachaiming mark.2. Discuss thegroups and recordthe group sizes.

1.FamiliarisationSingle Rounds

25 mProne

10rounds

2 x 25 mmsquare aimingmarks on ascreen

2.FamiliarisationBursts onScreen

25 mProne

12rounds

(4 magsof 3

rounds)

4 x 25 mmaiming marks ona screen

1. Fire one burstof 3 rounds ateach aiming mark.2. Discuss thegroups, record thegroup sizes.

3. ConfirmationBursts

25 mProne

12rounds

4 x 25 mm aiming marks ona screen

1. Fire one burstof 2-3 rounds ateach aiming mark.2. Discuss thegroups and recordthe first round andburst group sizes.

LSW LF 2. — ZEROING AND GROUPING AT 100 METRES


LF0201. Aim. To determine the soldier’s grouping ability and superimpose hisMPI onto the CZP.


LF0203. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete allpractices. If AMS is used it may be possible to reduce the timings.

LF0204. Stores.


or1 x Figure 12d per firer (on AMS converted range)50 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition(additional ammunition may be required for reshoots)


a. Soldiers must achieve a 225 mm group with 20 rounds from the proneposition at 100 metres during Practice 1 before their sights are adjusted.

b. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and soldiers (when applicable) are tobe fully conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle 5.56 mm Modified L85A2, Light Support WeaponModified L86A2 and Associated Equipments (Army Code No. 71753) orInfantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 6, 5.56 mm Rifle andLight Support Weapon (Army Code No. 71374), relating to Zeroing.

c. Trainees at Infantry Training Centre (Catterick) who are to carry the LSWat Battle Camp are to fire all the Practices in this lesson. The remainder are tofire Practices 2 – 5 as registration shoots and are to note the amount of adjust-ment required to their point of aim to enable them to hit the target centrally.These soldiers must use the same weapon for the remainder of the shoots inthe CIC Training syllabus.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-17


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-18


1. Fire 4 x 5round groups atthe same aimingmark.2. Firer is to applyhis safety catch,stand up, then re-adopt his positionbetween eachgroup.3. Discuss thegroup and mea-sure the groupsize.4. Identify theMPI and adjust forzero if necessary.

1. GroupingSingle Rounds

100 mProne

20rounds

Figure 11 with 75mm x 100 mmwhite patch on ascreen orAMS Figure 12d

2. CheckGroupSingle Rounds

100 mProne

5rounds


1. Fire a 5 roundcheck group toconfirm zero.2. Discuss thegroup, record thegroup size.3. If the correctzero is notachieved (seeRifle Lesson 15),repeat Practice 1using the groupplus a further 15rounds.

Standards


Practice 2 — 150 mmPractice 3 — 150 mmPractice 4 — 300 mmPractice 5 — 300 mm


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-19


2. CheckGroupSingle Rounds (cont)

4. Once zeroingis correct, recordon SAC.


100 mFire Trench

5rounds


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup.2. Discuss thegroup, record thegroup size.3. Compare theMPI achieved inthe prone positionand note anyrequirement toaim off.

4. GroupingBursts

100 mFire Trench

10rounds


1. Fire a 10 roundgroup in bursts of2–3 rounds toidentify the POA.2. Discuss thegroup, record thegroup size.

5. GroupingBursts

100 mProne

10rounds


1. Fire a 10 roundgroup in bursts of2-3 rounds toidentify the POA.2. Discuss thegroup, record thegroup size.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-20

LSW LF 3. — APPLICATION OF THE GROUP AT 100 METRES


LF0301. Aim. To confirm that the soldier can apply his group to the centre of thetarget from the prone and fire trench positions.


LF0303. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete allpractices. If AMS is used it may be possible to reduce the timings.

LF0304. Stores.

Normal range stores2 x 1.220 m screens with Figure 11 per firer

or1 x Figure 12d per firer (on AMS converted range)28 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-21

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-22


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup.2. Discuss thegroup, record thegroup size.


100 mProne

5rounds

Figure 11 on ascreen orAMS Figure 12d

2. GroupingBursts

100 mProne

9rounds

Figure 11 on ascreen orAMS Figure 12d

1. Fire 9 roundsin bursts of 2–3rounds at thesame aimingmark.2. Discuss thegroup, position ofthe MPI and noteany adjustmentsneeded to thePOA.3. Record thegroup size.


100 mFire Trench

5rounds


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup.2. Discuss thegroup, position ofthe MPI and noteany adjustmentsneeded to thePOA.3. Record thegroup size.

4. GroupingBursts

100 mFire Trench

9rounds


1. Fire 9 roundsin bursts of 2–3rounds at thesame aimingmark.2. Discuss thegroup, position ofthe MPI and noteany adjustmentsneeded to thePOA.3. Record thegroup size.

Standards


Practice 1 — 150 mmPractice 2 — 300 mmPractice 3 — 150 mmPractice 4 — 300 mm


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-23

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-24

LSW LF 4. — ELEMENTARY APPLICATION OF FIRE200–400 METRES


LF0401. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by deliberate fire, usingsingle shots and controlled bursts, from the prone and fire trench positions.

LF0402. Conduct. The lesson should ideally be conducted on either a CGR (withor without AMS), or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to AMS.

LF0403. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 55 minutes to complete allpractices. If AMS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings.

LF0404. Stores.

Normal range storesGallery Range or CGR without AMS100–300 m — 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a

760 mm and a 1.220 m circle400 m — 1 x Triple Figure 11 per firerCGR and ETR fitted with AMSCGR Right Coffin — Triple Figure 11 } In each

Left Coffin — Single Figure 11 } laneETR 100 m and 200 m — Single Figure 11

300 m — Triple Figure 11or

AMS converted rangeAMS Figure 11 with scoring area image on monitor (100-200 metres)AMS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor (300-400 metres)54 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)


a. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the lesson is fired on anETR without AMS, Practices 4, 5 and 6 are to be fired from the 400 m firingpoint at a single Figure 11 on the 200 m bank of targets. This will restrict thenumber of firers to 8 (Targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12).

b. Sufficient ammunition has been allocated to fire bursts of 3 rounds. Firersare only to fire the number of bursts indicated in the instructions column of thepractice details, regardless of whether all allocated rounds are used.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-25

c. Firers are to be reminded of the need to count rounds fired and to regulatethe length of bursts to 2–3 rounds.


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-26



1. DeliberateSingle Rounds

200 mFire Trench

5rounds

Figure 11 on a1.220 m screenorAMS Figure 11


200 mProne

5rounds



3. DeliberateBursts

200 mProne

12rounds


1. Fire 4 bursts of2–3 rounds.2. Fire is judged tobe effective if thefigure target is hitonce in eachburst.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-27


3. DeliberateBursts

3. Score 4 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.4. MPI is to beindicated aftereach burst.


300 mProne

5rounds




300 mFire Trench

5rounds



6. DeliberateBursts

300 mFire Trench

12rounds


1. Fire 4 bursts of2–3 rounds.2. Fire is judgedto be effective ifthe figure target ishit once in eachburst.3. Score 4 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.4. MPI is to beindicated aftereach burst.

Scoring


Practices 1, 2, 4 and 5.

Hits within the representative 760mm circle ON the figure — 4 pointsHits within the representative 760mm circle OFF the figure — 2 pointsHits within the representative 1.220 m circle — 1 point

Practices 3 and 6

For each effective engagement — 4 points (HPS 16 points)

Practices 7 and 8

Hits on the target — 4 points (HPS 20 points)

LF0410. All shots fired are to be signalled. As each shot/burst arrives, the target islowered immediately, a spotting disc is to be placed into each shot hole and the tar-get raised without delay. The marker paddle is to be used to point out the MPI of theburst and indicate the appropriate score. When the next shot/burst arrives the targetis lowered immediately, the spotting disc moved to the latest shot hole position, the

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-28




400 mProne

5rounds

Triple Figure 11orAMS TripleFigure 11


400 mFire Trench

5rounds

Triple Figure 11orAMS Figure 11


previous shot hole(s) patched out and the target raised without delay and so on. Thesuggested signals are:





Standards



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-29


% Hits Score % Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement(Personal Weapon)

OMS Requirement(Alternative Personal

Weapon)

1 200 m 22 70% 39 60% 33 56

2

3

300 m

400 m

22

10

70%

70%

39

28

50%

50%

28

20

56

40

106 81 152

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-30

LSW LF 5. — ELEMENTARY APPLICATION OF FIRE400–600 METRES


LF0501. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets at longer ranges bydeliberate fire, using single shots from the prone position.


LF0503. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete allpractices. If AMS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings.

LF0504. Stores.

Normal range storesGallery Range1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 11 per firer with triple Figure 11 image on monitor30 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T per firer(Ball ammunition if a tracer ban is in force)


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-31

Scoring


All Practices (in the repeat practice)

Hits on the target — 4 points

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-32


1. Fire 5 roundsapplication.2. All shots are tobe signalled.3. Record theappropriate POAon the shootingrecord card.4. Repeat thepractice andrecord the score.

1. DeliberateSingle Rounds(Fired Twice)

400 mProne

10rounds

Triple Figure 11


500 mProne

10rounds

Triple Figure 11 1. Fire 5 roundsapplication.2. All shots are tobe signalled.3. Record theappropriate POAon the shootingrecord card.4. Repeat thepractice andrecord the score.


600 mProne

10rounds

Triple Figure 11 1. Fire 5 roundsapplication.2. All shots are tobe signalled.3. Record theappropriate POAon the shootingrecord card.4. Repeat thepractice andrecord the score.

LF0509. All shots fired are to be signalled. As each shot/burst arrives, the target islowered immediately, a spotting disc is to be placed into each shot hole and the tar-get raised without delay. The marker paddle is to be used to point out the position ofthe MPI and indicate the appropriate score. When the next shot arrives the target islowered immediately, the spotting disc moved to the latest shot hole position, the pre-vious shot hole(s) patched out and the target raised without delay and so on. Thesuggested signals are:



Standards



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-33



HighestPossible

Score(HPS)



Weapon)

1 400 m 10 70% 28 50% 20 40

2

3

500 m

600 m

10

10

70%

70%

28

28

50%

50%

20

20

40

40

84 60 120

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-34

LSW LF 6. — ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE100–400 METRES


LF0601. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by snap, rapid and burstfire from the prone and fire trench positions.

LF0602. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR (with orwithout AMS), where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR.



LF0605. Stores.

Normal range storesETR1 x Figure 11 at 100/200 metres1 x Triple Figure 11 at 300 metresCGRRight Coffin — Triple Figure 11 } In eachLeft Coffin — Single Figure 11 } laneGallery Range1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100–300 metres1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer at 400 metres

orAMS converted rangeAMS Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metresAMS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer at 400 metres93 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)


PreliminariesLF0606. Safety. Normal safety precautions.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-35

LF0608. Miscellaneous. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when thelesson is fired on an ETR without AMS, Practices 7, 8 and 9 are to be fired from the400 m firing point at a single Figure 11 on the 200 m bank of targets. This will restrictthe number of firers to 8 (Targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12).

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-36



1. SnapSingle Rounds

100 mProne

5rounds


2. RapidSingle Rounds

100 mProne

10rounds


1. Firer in thestanding alert posi-tion (bipod folded),5 m to the rear ofthe firing point.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire 10 roundsat the exposure.4. Target up andhold.

3. TimedBursts

100 mFire Trench

12rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 5 secondexposures with

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-37


3. Fire one burstof 2–3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Fire is judgedto be effective ifthe target is hitonce in each burst.5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.

3. TimedBursts (cont)

intervals of 10seconds.


200 mProne

5rounds



5. TimedBursts

200 mProne

12rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 13 secondexposure fol-lowed by 3 x 5second expo-sures with inter-vals of 10 sec-onds.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire one burstof 2-3 seconds ateach exposure.5. Score 2 pointsfor each engage-ment.6.Targets fallwhen hit.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-38


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 10 roundsat the exposure.4. Target up andhold.


200 mFire Trench

10rounds



300 mProne

5rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3 Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.


300 mFire Trench

10rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 10 roundsat the exposure.4. Target up andhold.

9. TimedBursts

300 mFire Trench

12rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 5 secondexposures withintervals of 10seconds.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 2–3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Fire is judgedto be effective ifthe target is hitonce in eachburst.

Scoring


Practices 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 10 — One point per hit

Practices 3, 5 and 9 — 2 points per successful engagement

Standards



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-39


5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.



400 mProne

12rounds

1. Triple Figure11orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 6 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3 Fire 4 rounds ateach exposure.4. Targets up andhold.



HighestPossible

Score(HPS)



Weapon)

1 100 m 27 70% 16 70% 16 23

2

3

200 m

300 m

27

27

70%

70%

16

16

60%

50%

13

11

23

23

56 46 81

4 400 m 12 70% 8 50% 6 12

LSW LF 6 — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-40



100 mFigure 11

2 100 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 26

Up and hold.

3 100 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1121 2737 4353 59

Fall when hit.

4 100 mFigure 11

As for Practice 1 Fall when hit.

5 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1929 3545 51

1:01 1:076 200 m

Figure 11UP DOWN05 18

Fall when hit.

Up and hold.

7 300 mFigure 11

As for Practice 1 1. Fall when hit.2. Soldiers fire fromthe 400 m firing point.

8 300 m Figure 11

UP DOWN05 18

1. Up and hold.2. Soldiers fire fromthe 400 m firing point.

9 300 mFigure 11

As for Practice 3 1. Fall when hit.2. Soldiers fire fromthe 400 m firing point.

400 mTriple Figure 11

10 UP DOWN05 1217 2428 3540 47

Up and hold.



LF0701. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by snap, rapid and burstfire from the prone position.




LF0705. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer

orAMS converted rangeAMS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer36 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T per firer(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-41

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-42

Scoring


All Practices — One point per hit

Standards



1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 3 roundsat each exposure.4. Targets up andhold.


400 mProne

12rounds

1. Triple Figure11orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 6 secondexposures withintervals of 10seconds.


500 mProne

12rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 3 roundsat each exposure.4. Target up andhold.


600 mProne

12rounds



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-43




HighestPossible

Score(HPS)



Weapon)

1 400 m 12 70% 8 50% 6 12

2

3

500 m

600 m

12

12

70%

70%

8

8

50%

50%

6

6

12

12

24 18 36

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-44




Up and hold.1 UP DOWN05 1222 2939 4656 1:03


2 500 mTriple Figure 11

As for Practice 1 Up and hold.



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-45



LF0801. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets by snap and burst firefrom the prone and fire trench positions.



LF0804. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 50 minutes to complete allpractices. If an ETR is used it may be possible to reduce the timings.

LF0805. Stores.

Normal range storesETR1 x Single Figure 11 per firer at 100/200 metres1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer at 300 metresCGR Right Coffin — Triple Figure 11 } In eachLeft Coffin — Single Figure 11 } laneGallery Range1 x Single Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer at 400–600 metres

orAMS converted rangesAMS Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metresAMS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer at 400-600 metres92 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)


PreliminariesLF0806. Safety. Normal safety precautions.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-46

LF0808. Miscellaneous. RCOs are to note that when the lesson is fired on anETR without AMS, Practices 5 and 6 are to be fired from the 400 m firing point at asingle Figure 11 on the 200 m bank of targets. This will restrict the number of firersto 8 (Targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12).

Practice Details



1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.


100 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 12 secondexposure fol-lowed by 4 x 4second expo-sures with irregu-lar intervals.

2. TimedBursts

100 mProne

12rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 12 secondexposure fol-lowed by 3 x 4second expo-sures with inter-vals of 10 sec-onds.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-47


and fire one burstof 2-3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Fire is judged tobe effective if thetarget is hit oncein each burst.5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.



200 mFire Trench

10rounds



4. TimedBursts

200 mProne

12rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 2–3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Fire is judgedto be effective ifthe target is hitonce in eachburst.5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-48


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.


300 mProne

5rounds


6. TimedBursts

300 mFire Trench

12rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 2–3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Fire is judgedto be effective ifthe target is hitonce in eachburst.5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-49


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire 3 roundsat each exposure.4. Targets up andhold.


400 mProne

12rounds

1. Triple Figure11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 12 secondexposure fol-lowed by 3 x 6second expo-sures with irregu-lar intervals.


500 mProne

12rounds




600 mProne

12rounds

1. Triple Figure11or AMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 6 secondexposures withirregular intervals.


Scoring


Practices 1, 3, 5, 7, 8 and 9 — One point per hit

Practices 2, 4 and 6 — 2 points per successful engagement

Standards



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-50



HighestPossible

Score(HPS)



Weapon)

1 100 m 17 70% 9 70% 9 13

2

3

200 m

300 m

22

17

70%

70%

12

9

60%

50%

10

7

18

13

54 44 80

1

2

3

400 m

500 m

600 m

12

12

12

70%

70%

70%

8

8

8

50%

50%

50%

6

6

6

12

12

12



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-51



100 mFigure 11

2 100 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1828 3343 4858 1:03

Fall when hit.

3 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1218 2529 3641 4851 58

Up and hold.

4 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1121 2737 4353 59

Fall when hit.

5 300 mFigure 11

As for Practice 1

6 300 mFigure 11

As for Practice 4

1. Fall when hit.2. Soldiers fire from400 m firing point.1. Fall when hit.2. Soldiers fire from400 m firing point.


UP DOWN05 2128 3539 4651 58

Up and hold.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-52


Up and hold.8 UP DOWN05 1219 2630 3742 49




LSW APWT(CI) AND APWA(CI)



a. APWT(CI). LSW APWT(CI) is to be fired annually by all combat infantry-men whose personal weapon is the LSW.

b. APWA(CI). Practices 1, 4, 6, 7 and 8 of LSW APWT(CI) are to be firedby all Infantry soldiers during the CIC.

APWT0102. Ranges. LSW APWT(CI)/APWA(CI) can be fired on an ETR,Gallery Range or CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to AMS the fir-ing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them.

APWT0103. Range Rigging. CGRs and ETRs are to be rigged as follows:

a. CGR Right Coffin — Triple Figure 11 } In eachLeft Coffin — Single Figure 11 } lane

b. ETR 100 m and 200 m — Single Figure 11300 m — Triple Figure 11

c. AMS Ranges 100-300 m — AMS Figure 11400-600 m — AMS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11

image on monitor

Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the APWT(CI) is fired on an ETR,Practices 5, 6 and 7 are to be fired from the 400 m firing point at a single Figure 11on the 200 m bank of targets.

APWT0104. Timings. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all prac-tices of APWT(CI) and approximately 30 minutes to complete the required APWA(CI)practices. If an ETR is used these timings might reduce.

APWT0105. Rules.





RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-53


f. All positions are to be bipod supported.

g. Ammunition allocation for APWA(CI) includes 20 rounds for registrationfrom which 5 rounds are to be fired at each range prior to starting practices.

APWT0106. Time Charts. Time charts for the APWT and APWA are includedafter the Practice Details.




APWT0108. Scoring.

Practices 1, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 and 11 — One point per hit

Practices 2, 4 and 7 — 2 points per effective engagement

APWT0109. Standard. To achieve the required standard the firer must achievethe OMS at each firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMSat any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the prac-tices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firerswho fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness,before re-testing.

a. APWT(CI).

Marksman. To qualify as LSW Marksman all practices must be passed.Soldiers who qualify as LSW Marksmen are eligible to wear the Marksmanbadge for 1 year before they must requalify.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-54


% Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 17 70% 9 13

2

3

200 m

300 m

22

32

70%

70%

12

19

18

28

4

5

6

400 m

500 m

600 m

12

21

12

70%

70%

70%

8

14

8

12

21

12

b. APWA(CI).

c. Whilst it is not mandatory for firers to qualify at each firing distance on thesame day, the entire AWA should be successfully completed within a sensibletime.


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-55


% Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 5 70% 3 5

2

3

200 m

300 m

12

22

60%

50%

5

9

8

18

4 400 m 12 50% 6 12


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)


100 mProne

5rounds


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-56


and fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

1. SnapSingle Rounds(cont)

2. TimedBursts

100 mFire Trench

12rounds

1. Figure 11 orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 5 secondexposures withintervals of 10seconds.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 2-3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Fire is judged tobe effective if thetarget is hit oncein each burst.5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.


200 mProne

10rounds


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire 10 roundsat the exposure.4. Targets up andhold.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-57


4. TimedBursts

200 mFire Trench

12rounds



5. Snap SingleRounds

300 mProne

10rounds


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire 2 roundsat each exposure.4. Targets up andhold.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-58



300 mProne

10rounds



7. TimedBursts

300 mFire Trench

12rounds



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-59



400 mProne

12rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Targets up andhold.


500 mProne

12rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Targets up andhold.1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to runonto the firingpoint, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire 3 roundsat each exposure.4. Targets up andhold.


500 mProne

9rounds

1. Triple Figure11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 15 secondexposure fol-lowed by 2 x 6second expo-sures with irregu-lar intervals.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-60



600 mProne

12rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Targets up andhold.

LSW APWT (CI) — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-61



100 mFigure 11

2 100 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1121 2737 4353 59

Fall when hit.

3 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 26

Up and hold.

4 200 mFigure 11


5 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1825 3035 4046 5155 1:00

6 300 mFigure 11

As for Practice 3

1. Up and hold.2. Soldiers fire from400 m firing point.



UP DOWN05 1219 2630 3742 49

Up and hold.

7 300 mFigure 11

As for Practice 2 1. Fall when hit.2. Soldiers fire from400 m firing point.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-62





UP DOWN05 2128 3539 46


As for Practice 8

Up and hold.

Up and hold.

LSW APWA (CI) — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-63


1. Fall when hit.2. No score.

Sighters UP DOWN05 1621 3237 4853 1:04

1:09 1:20

100 mFigure 11

1 100 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1724 2833 3743 4751 55

Fall when hit.

Sighters 200 mFigure 11

As for sighters at 100 m


4 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1121 2737 4353 59

Fall when hit.

Sighters 300 mFigure 11


6 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 26

1. Fall when hit.2. Soldiers fire from400 m firing point.3. No score.1. Up and hold.2. Soldiers fire from400 m firing point.

Sighters 400 mTriple Figure 11



7 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1121 2737 4353 59

1. Fall when hit.2. Soldiers fire from400 m firing point.


Up and hold.UP DOWN05 1219 2630 3742 49

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-64

LSW APWT/APWA (OA&SVCS)



a. APWT(OA&Svcs) is to be fired annually by all Other Arms and Service per-sonnel whose personal weapon is the LSW.

b. APWA (OA&Svcs) Practices 1, 4, 6 and 7 of the LSW APWT (OA&Svcs)may be fired annually by soldiers of the OA&Svcs who have been allocated theLSW as an alternate personal weapon.

APWT0202. Ranges. LSW APWT(OA&Svcs)/APWA (OA&Svcs) can be fired onan ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to AMSthe firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them.

APWT0203. Range Rigging. CGR and ETR are to be rigged as follows:

a. CGR Right Coffin — Triple Figure 11 } In eachLeft Coffin — Single Figure 11 } lane

b. ETR 100 m and 200 m — Single Figure 11.300 m — Triple Figure 11.

c. AMS Ranges 100-300 m — AMS Figure 11.400 m — AMS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11

image on monitor

Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the test is fired on an ETR,Practices 5, 6 and 7 are to be fired from the 400 m firing point at a single Figure 11on the 200 m bank of targets.


APWT0205. Rules.

a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt orderwebbing, combat body armour (where issued), combat helmets and issued,serviceable hearing protection.




RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-65


f. All positions are to be bipod supported.

APWT0206. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.


a. APWT (OA&Svcs) — 73 rounds.

b. APWA (OA&Svcs) — 34 rounds.

APWT0208. Magazines. Magazines are to be filled and used in the followingorder:

APWT 17, 17, 27 and 12

APWA 5, 12 and 17

APWT0209. Scoring.

Practices 1, 3, 5, 6 and 8 — One point per hit.

Practices 2, 4 and 7 — 2 points per effective engagement

APWT0210. Standard. To achieve the required standard the firer must achievethe OMS at each firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMSat any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the prac-tices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firerswho fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness,before re-testing.

a. APWT (OA&Svcs).

Marksman — 51 (85%). To qualify for Marksman all practices must be fired.Soldiers who qualify as Marksmen are eligible to wear the badge for 1 yearbefore they must requalify.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-66


% Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 17 70% 9 13

2

3

200 m

300 m

17

27

70%

60%

9

14

13

23

4 400 m 12 50% 6 12

b. APWA(OA&Svcs).

c. Whilst it is not mandatory for firers to qualify at each firing distance in thesame day, the entire AWA should be successfully completed within a sensibletime.


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-67


% Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 100 m 5 60% 3 5

2

3

200 m

300 m

12

17

50%

50%

4

6

8

13




100 mProne

5rounds


2. TimedBursts

100 mFire Trench

12rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 5 secondexposures with

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-68



intervals of 10seconds.

3. Fire one burstof 2-3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Fire is judged tobe effective if thetarget is hit oncein each burst.5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.

200 mProne


5rounds

1. Figure 11 orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 15 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition (bipodfolded), 5 m to therear of the firingpoint.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to runonto the firing point, adopt thenominated posi-tion (bipod down)and fire 5 roundsat the exposure. 4. Targets up andhold.

4. TimedBursts

200 m Fire Trench

12rounds

1. Figure 11 orAMS Figure 11.2. 4 x 5 secondexposures withintervals of 10seconds.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 2-3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Fire is judged tobe effective if thetarget is hit once

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-69


4. TimedBursts(cont)

in each burst.5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.

300 mProne


10rounds




300 mProne

5rounds



7. TimedBursts

300 mFire Trench

12rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 2-3 rounds ateach exposure.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-70


7. TimedBursts(cont)

4. Fire is judged tobe effective if thetarget is hit oncein each burst.5. Score 2 pointsfor each effectiveengagement.6. Targets fallwhen hit.

400 mProne


12rounds



LSW APWT (OA&SVCS) — TIME CHART

One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery rangesthis will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 4-71



100 mFigure 11

2 100 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1121 2737 4353 59

Fall when hit.

3 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 21

Up and hold.

4 200 mFigure 11


5 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1017 2227 3238 4347 52

6 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 21




UP DOWN05 1218 2530 3741 48

Up and hold.

7 300 mFigure 11


LSW APWA (OA&SVCS) — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED4-72



100 mFigure 11

4 200 mFigure 11


6 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 21


7 300 mFigure 11


Chapter 5

THE LIGHT MACHINE GUN (LMG)

Scope

0501. Chapter 5 sets out all LSW live fir-ing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMTStages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the BattleShot. It includes the application of lessonsto all Arms and Services and the progres-sion and frequency with which they are tobe fired.

0502. This progression and frequency of fir-ing is essential for preparing soldiers forLMG Annual Personal Weapon Tests(APWT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essentialin preparing the firer for mandatory TLFTTand LFTT. The actual detail of TLFTT andLFTT is in Chapters 6 and 7 respectively.


0503. Small Arms Trainer (SAT) andDismounted Close Combat Trainer(DCCT). SAT or DCCT LF lessons are anintegral part of Training the Battle Shot andhave been selected, where appropriate, to confirm the basic skills in each Stagebefore live firing and to enable the coach to eliminate faults which have hitherto onlybeen detectable during live firing. All LMG LF lessons and AWAs are included in theSAT/DCCT software and can be used for practices, remedial training or as concur-rent activity to a range or other period. (The SAT or DCCT cannot be used as a sub-stitute for live firing of any Annual Weapon Test or Assessment.)

0504. Automatic Marking System (AMS). Vital shooting and coaching informa-tion can be gained, and time, manpower and ammunition saved, by the correct useof AMS. It permits Grouping, Zeroing and Elementary Application of Fire lessons tobe conducted on Electric Target Ranges (ETR) and Converted Gallery Ranges(CGR) without using butt markers or screen targets. In Advanced Application of Firelessons, AMS can be used to indicate to the firer and coach where shots are hittingor missing the target. RCOs are to ensure their coaches are thoroughly familiar withAMS before any LF lesson begins. All LF lessons are contained in AMS software.Where the targetry differs because of AMS, the difference is highlighted in the rele-vant lesson(s).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-1

CONTENTS

SCOPE 5-1




SAFETY 5-3




WHTs 5-7

LF LESSON 1 5-9LF LESSON 2 5-11LF LESSON 3 5-13LF LESSON 4 5-17LF LESSON 5 5-21LF LESSON 6 5-25

APWT/APWA (CI) 5-31


Aids to Training and Firing

0506. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). To avoid wasting time and ammunition theSAC is to be used to reduce excessive displacement between the Mean Point ofImpact (MPI) and the Correct Zero Position (CZP) before zeroing. When LMGs havebeen zeroed, the SAC is to be used to record the PZP readings. Thereafter, SAC isto be used before any LF lesson to ensure that boresight readings have not changed.To save range time it is recommended that boresighting is conducted on the day priorto the lesson.

0507. Ammunition. All LMG LF lessons from LFMT Stage 2 onwards are to beconducted using 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition unless range orders or local restrictions(especially a tracer ban) preclude its use.

0508. Sandbags. The use of sandbags for support while shooting is no longerpermissible during any lessons or tests in LFMT or TLFTT.


0509. Reserved.

0510. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and TA Units — Initial Training. The fol-lowing LF lessons are to be fired, initially, by all combat infantrymen whose personalweapon is to be the LMG:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-2

LMG LFLesson No Content Page No


2 Grouping at 100 metres (initial training only) 5-11 to 5-12

3 Zeroing at 100 metres 5-13 to 5-15

1 Introductory Shoot at 25 metres — Preparationof Firing, Grouping and Length of Burst,Cleaning after Firing (initial training only)

5-9 to 5-10

0511. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and TA Units — Annual Training. Thefollowing LF lessons are to be fired, annually, after the initial training stipulated inparagraph 0510, by all combat infantrymen whose personal weapon is the LSW:

0512. Remedial Training. SAT/DCCT and AMS provide invaluable aids to theremedial training of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facil-ities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use oflive firing. All LMG LF lessons can be fired on SAT/DCCT and may be used as aremedial aid or as a rehearsal prior to firing on the open range.

Safety


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-3



5 Application of Fire at 300-400 metres 5-21 to 5-23

6 Advanced Application of Fire at 200-300 and400 metres including NBC

5-25 to 5-28

4 Application of Fire at 200 metres 5-17 to 5-19





5

6

Application of Fire 300-400 metres

Advanced Application of Fire 200-300 and 400 metres

5-21 to 5-23

5-25 to 5-28




LMG complete to CES 1 per soldierCleaning material As requiredIssued, serviceable hearing protection 1 per soldierCombat Helmets 1 per soldierCBA (where issued) 1 per soldierPersonal Shooting Record Card (AF B6994A/B) 1 per soldierCoach’s Aide Memoire (AF B71158) 1 per coachBinoculars 1 per coachFirst aid kit CompleteSAC As requiredStop watches As required

0516. Dress. Dress for LMG LF lessons should include belt order webbing.Combat helmets and CBA (where issued) are to be worn for all SAT and LF lessons.


0518. Sighting System. The LMG can be fitted with SUSAT or Iron sights. Initialtraining should be conducted using the sighting system most likely to be used, wherethis is unknown the SUSAT is to be used. The annual LF lessons and APWT shouldbe fired to convert to the second sighting system.

0519. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). SAC is to be used to boresight the LMGprior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the PZP reading from SAC is to benoted in the firers’ shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to anyfuture LF lesson.


a. Where possible, LMGs are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to therange, to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those thatmay be experienced on the range.

b. Check each soldier has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and hisshooting record card in his possession.

c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. Duringgrouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the cor-rect point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-4


0521. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be the bot-tom centre of the patch.

0522. Coaching. Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 8,LMG (Army Code No. 71811) contains full detail of coaching requirements. Someessential points to ensure are:



c. If using SUSAT for ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to beset at 300. Soldiers are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing atranges beyond 300 metres. If using Iron sights the small aperture is to be used.


e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary andadvanced application of fire lessons.

0523. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches togain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detailshould be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot orburst. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firersare given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.






c. Pack kit.

d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, forecastof the next LMG LF lesson.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-5




a. Soldiers in Regular and TA units whose personal weapon is the LMG areto complete their tests every six months; those allocated a LMG as an alternatepersonal weapon are to complete the tests once a year. All tests are to be car-ried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, current and competentinstructor.









0532. Training Performance Standards. The Training Performance Standardsto be achieved for the LMG are:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-6

LMG As Personal Weapon Skilled

LMG As Alternate Personal Weapon to Pistol Average

WHTs LMG

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-7

TestNo Subject Stores Conditions Marking

1 Safety Gun unloaded.Gun either inthe corner of aroom or on thefiring point.

1. Order the soldierto bring the gun tothe centre of theroom, or to anotherposition on the firingpoint.2. The soldier, with-out further directive,is to carry out thenormal safety pre-cautions on the gun.

The soldier is award-ed ‘Fail’ if the safetyactions are not car-ried out correctly.

2 StrippingCleaningAssembling

LMGSpare partswallet, com-plete.

1. Order the soldierto strip the gun fordaily cleaning. Askhim the following:

a. What size flan-nelette is used to oilthe bore?b. What size flan-nelette is used to oilthe cylinder?

2. Order the soldierto assemble the gun.

1. The main purposeof this test is toassess the soldier’sability to strip andassemble the gun. Heshould therefore beassessed with this inmind.2. Standard:Skilled — All actionscorrect.Average — 1–3mistakes.Fail — More than 3mistakes.3. Award noqualification if anymistake affectssafety.

3 Loading LMGBelt of 15 drillrounds.Stop watch.

Gunner lying behindthe gun. Safety catchat ‘Fire’. Belt on theground on the left ofthe gun. Order“Load”.

1. Standard:Skilled — All actionscorrect.Average — 1-3mistakes.Fail — More than 3mistakes.2. Award no qualifi-cation if any mistakeaffects safety.

Lessons 1 – 6 and the APWT and APWA

0533. The details of LF Lessons 1 – 6 and the APWT and APWA are contained inthe remaining pages of this chapter. Each lesson is contained in separate pages foreasy use.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-8

TestNo Subject Stores Conditions Marking

4 ImmediateAction andGasStoppage

As forTest No. 3.

1. Gunner behind thegun, gun loaded andfiring. Order “Gunstops”. When IA hasbeen done, order“Gun fires a fewrounds and stopsagain”.2. Mistakes made inthe IA count for thetest.

1. No time limit isimposed but allactions should becarried out quicklyand correctly.2. Standard:Skilled — All actionscorrect.Average — 1 or 2mistakes.Fail — More than 2mistakes.3. Award no qualifi-cation if any mistakeaffects safety.

5 Unloading As forTest No. 3

1. Gunner behind thegun, gun loaded andfiring. Order “Stop”and when actionshave been carriedout correctly give thecommand “Unload”.2. The test is notcomplete until thegunner is standing upbehind the gun.

1. Standard:Skilled — All actionscorrect.Average — 1–3mistakes.Fail — More than 3mistakes.2. Award noqualification if anymistake affectssafety.

LMG LF 1. — INTRODUCTORY SHOOT 25 METRES


LF0101. Aim. To teach the preparation of the gun for firing and then to confirmthat the soldier can hold, aim and fire the LMG in controlled bursts. Finally to teachcleaning the gun after firing.

LF0102. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETRwith screens placed 25 metres from the firers.


LF0104. Stores.

Normal range storesTargets:

1 x witness screen per firer each with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marksAmmunition:

30 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) per firer

LF0105. Miscellaneous. This lesson is to be fired by all soldiers during their ini-tial year of training with the LMG.


Preliminaries

LF0106. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels forobstructions).

LF0107. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate, as necessary, therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

LF0108. Preparing the Gun for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures forcleaning the gun before firing.

LF0109. Confirmation. Confirm by practice. Prepare the guns for firing.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-9

Practice Details


Standards

LF0111. An average burst group size of 125 mm in Practice 3 (SUSAT or IronSights).


LF0112. Cleaning After Firing. Confirm stripping, cleaning and assembling.

LF0113. Confirmation. Confirm by practice. Guns are to be inspected and leftlightly oiled.

LF0114. Care After Cleaning. Remind: Under normal conditions the bore,chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected andreoiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the gun has been fired.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-10

Practice Range/Position Ammunition Target/

Exposure Instructions

1.Familiarisation

25 mProne

6 rounds(Two 3 round

belts)

Stop butt Fire each belt in oneburst. Carry out IAafter each expendedbelt.

2. Length ofBurst

25 mProne

12 rounds(Four 3

round belts)

4 x 25 mm aimingmarks on a screen

1. Fire one burst ofthree rounds at eachaiming mark.2. Discuss the groupsand record the groupsizes.

3.Confirmation

25 mProne

12 rounds(One 12

round belt)

4 x 25 mm aimingmarks on a screen

1. Fire one burst ofthree rounds at eachaiming mark.2. Discuss the groupsand record the firstround and burstgroup sizes.

LMG LF 2. — GROUPING AT 100 METRES


LF0201. Aim. To determine the soldiers grouping ability with the LMG.

LF0202. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or with-out AMS), an ETR (with or without AMS), a GR, a 100 m Zeroing Range or aMMTTR.


LF0204. Stores.


2 x 1.220 m screens with Fig 11 per firer (1 x 1.220 m screen per firer on anETR or MMTTR) each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned withthe bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure

or1 x Fig 12d per firer (on AMS converted range)

Ammunition:60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer (see para 0000).


Preliminaries


LF0206. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the rangerules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-11

Practice Details


Standards

LF0208. The standard to be achieved in Practice 2 and 3 is:

a. Acceptable — 750 mm group.

b. Desirable — 450 mm group.

Note: Firers using Iron sights must achieve the acceptable standard.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-12



100 mFire

Trench

1. Grouping 20rounds

Figure 11 with 75mm x 100 mmwhite patch on ascreen in front andrear target framesor AMS Figure 12d

1. Fire one burst of3-5 rounds at eachtarget.2. Examine the tar-gets and recordgroup sizes. 3. Repeat 1 and 2above.4. Calculate the aver-age group size fromthe total of fourgroups fired andrecord.5. Rounds remainingare to be handed in.

2. Grouping 100 mFire

Trench

20rounds

Figure 11 with 75mm x 100 mmwhite patch on ascreen or AMSFigure 12d

1. Fire 20 rounds inbursts of 3-5 roundsat the target.2. Examine the tar-get, record the groupsize.


20rounds


1. Fire 20 rounds inbursts of 3-5 roundsat the target.2. Examine the tar-get, record the groupsize.

LMG LF 3. — ZEROING AT 100 METRES


LF0301. Aim. To superimpose the soldier’s Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on theCorrect Zero Position (CZP).

LF0302. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with orwithout AMS), an ETR (with or without AMS), a GR, a 100 m Zeroing Range or aMMTTR.


LF0304. Stores.


1 x 1.220 m screen with Fig 11 per firer with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patchpositioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure


Ammunition:40 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer (SUSAT) (includes 5 rounds fire trench)60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer (Iron sights) (includes 5rounds fire trench)


a. Soldiers are to achieve a burst group size of 675 mm with 20 rounds inPractice 2 before sights are adjusted.

b. The correct zero position (CZP) is 75 mm above the point of aim. In Practice3 the gun is correctly zeroed if the distance from the CZP to the MPI is within 50mm.

c. If Iron sights are used both barrels are to be zeroed. If using SUSAT theregistration practice should be fired with the second barrel.

d. Only the Gunner is to make adjustments to the LMG sight. Once theweapon zero has been confirmed, the other fire team members are to fire andrecord any requirement to aim off. This aim off distance must be recorded andconfirmed by firing.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-13


Preliminaries



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-14



100 mProne

1. LimberingUp

5rounds

Stop butt(off the edge of thezeroing screen)

Fire 5 rounds inbursts.


20rounds


1. Fire 20 rounds inbursts of 3-5 roundsat the same aimingmark. Stand up afterevery second burst.2. Discuss the groupsize and position.3. Identify the MPIand adjust for zero ifnecessary.

3. CheckGroup

100 mProne

5rounds

As for Practice 2 1. Fire a 5 roundburst to determineMPI.2. If correct zero isnot achieved, repeatPractice 2 using thegroup plus a further15 rounds.

4. SUSATRegisterSecond Barrel

100 mProne

5rounds

As for Practice 2 1. Fire a 5 roundburst to determineMPI.2. Identify and recordthe POA necessaryto apply fire to thecentre of the target.

Standards

LF0309. A 5 round burst group size of 450 mm in Practice 3 and 4 (SUSAT and IronSights).


Note: Confirm MPI from Fire Trench prior to Application of Fire.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-15



4. Iron SightsZero SecondBarrel

100 mProne

OR

25rounds

As for Practice 2 As for Practice 2 and3.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-16

LMG LF 4. — APPLICATION OF FIRE AT 200 METRES


LF0401. Aim. To practise soldiers in engaging targets at 200 metres.

LF0402. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or with-out AMS), an ETR (if converted to AMS) or a GR.



LF0405. Stores.


GR or CGR without AMS: 2 x Double Fig 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firerCGR and ETR fitted with AMS1 x Double Fig 11 per firer

Ammunition:60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer (see para LF0409).

LF0406. Miscellaneous. Determine the firer’s expected scoring area and con-firm the POA/wind allowance.


Preliminaries



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-17

Practice Details


Note: Details of correct signalling procedure are contained in Volume I, Chapter 3.

ScoringLF0410. One point per hit in Practices 2 and 4.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-18



200 mProne

1. Sighting 10rounds

Double Figure 11 1. Fire two bursts of3-5 rounds.2. MPI of each burstto be signalled. (SeeNote)

2. Timed 200 mProne

20rounds

1. Double Figure11.2. 1 x 60 secondexposure.

1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 20 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.4. MPI to be signalledat the end of theexposure. (See Note)5. Targets up andhold.

3. Sighting 200 mFire

Trench

10rounds

Double Figure 11 1. Fire two bursts of3-5 rounds.2. MPI of each burstto be signalled. (SeeNote)

4. Timed 200 mFire

Trench

20rounds


1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 20 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.4. MPI to be signalledat the end of theexposure. (See Note)5. Targets up andhold.

Standard

LF0411. HPS — 40Pass — Acceptable 20 (50%)

Desirable 28 (70%)

Note: Firers using Iron Sights must achieve the acceptable standard.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-19

LMG LF 4 — TIME CHART

One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery rangesthis will be insufficient, therefore, additional time for target movement is to be allowed.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-20

Practice Range/Target Timings RemarksNo time limit1 200 m

Double Figure 111. Up and hold.2. MPI of each burst to be sig-nalled, (2 x bursts).

2 200 mDouble Figure 11

Up Down05 1:06

1. Up and hold.2. MPI to be signalled at end ofexposure.


As for Practice1.

As for Practice 1.


As for Practice2.

As for Practice 2.

LMG LF 5. — APPLICATION OF FIRE AT 300 AND 400 METRES


LF0501. Aim. To practise the soldier in engaging targets at 300 and 400 metres.




LF0505. Stores.


GR or CGR without AMS:2 x Triple Fig 11 per firerCGR or ETR fitted with AMS:1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer

Ammunition:65 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer (see para LF0509).

LF0506. Miscellaneous. Determine the firers’ expected scoring area and con-firm the POA/wind allowance.


Preliminaries



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-21

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-22



300 mProne


Triple Figure 11 1. Fire 10 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.2. MPI of each burstto be signalled.

2. Timed 300 mProne

15rounds

1. Triple Figure 11.2. 1 x 45 secondexposure.

1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 15 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.4. MPI to be signalledat the end of theexposure.5. Targets up andhold.

3. Timed 300 mFire

Trench

15rounds


1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 15 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.4. MPI to be signalledat the end of theexposure.5. Targets up andhold.

4. Sighting 400 mProne

10rounds


5. Timed 400 mProne

15rounds


1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watch andShoot”.3. Fire 15 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.4. MPI to be signalledat the end of theexposure.

Scoring

LF0510. One point per hit in Practices 2, 3 and 5.

Standard

LF0511. HPS — 45Pass — Acceptable 23 (50%)

Desirable 32 (70%)

Note: Firers using Iron Sights must achieve the acceptable standard.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-23


5.Timed (cont) 5. Targets up andhold.



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-24


Triple Figure 111. Up and hold.2. MPI of each burst to be sig-nalled, (2 x bursts).


Up Down05 51

1. Up and hold.2. MPI to be signalled at end ofexposure.


Up Down05 36

As for Practice 2.


As for Practice1.

As for Practice 1.


As for Practice2.

As for Practice 2.

LMG LF 6. — ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE AT200, 300 AND 400 METRES


LF0601. Aim. To practise the soldiers in taking up fire positions and engagingfleeting targets at ranges of 200, 300 and 400 metres (including NBC conditions).




LF0605. Stores.


GR or CGR without AMS:1 x Double Fig 11 per firer (200 metres) 1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer (300 and 400 metres)CGR or ETR fitted with AMS:1 x Double Fig 11 per firer (200 metres)1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer (300 and 400 metres)

Ammunition:120 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer

LF0606. Miscellaneous. Determine the firers’ expected scoring area and con-firm the POA/wind allowance.


Preliminaries



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-25

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-26



200 mProne


Double Figure 11 1. Fire 10 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.2. MPI of each burstto be signalled.

2. Timed 200 mProne

15rounds


1. Firers lined up 50metres to the rear ofthe firing point withguns loaded and car-ried by the carryinghandle.2. Order “Watch out– Advance”. Firersare to advance at thewalk.3. After 10 metres theRCO is to signal thetargets to be raised.4. The appearance ofthe targets is the sig-nal for the firers to runonto the firing point,adopt the nominatedposition, make readyand fire 15 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.5. Targets up andhold.

10rounds


Double Figure 11 1.Firer in the nominat-ed position.2. Fire 10 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.3. MPI of each burstto be signalled.

4.Timed 200 mProne

15rounds


1. Firers lined up 50metres to the rear ofthe firing point withguns loaded and car-ried by the carryinghandle.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-27



2. Order “Watch out– Advance”. Firersare to advance at thewalk.3. After 10 metres theRCO is to signal thetargets to be raised.4. The appearance ofthe targets is the sig-nal for the firers to runonto the firing point,adopt the nominatedposition, make readyand fire 15 rounds inbursts of 3-5 rounds.5. Targets up andhold.


10rounds


6. Timed 300 mProne

30 rounds

1. Triple Figure11.2. 6 x 3 secondexposures withirregular intervalsover a period ofone minute.

1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watch andShoot”.3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at eachexposure.4. Targets fall when hit.


10rounds


8. Timed 400 mProne

20rounds

1. Triple Figure11.2. 4 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervalsover a period oftwo minutes.

1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watch andShoot”.3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at eachexposure.4. Targets fall when hit.

Scoring


Practices 2 and 4 — One point per hit

Practices 6 and 8 — 5 points per successful engagement

Standards



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-28


% Hits/Successful

EngagementsScore

% Hits/Successful

EngagementsScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement(Personal Weapon

(SUSAT))


Weapon (SUSAT or IronSight)) and

Personal Weapon (IronSight)

1

2

200 m

300 m

30

30

70%

70%

21

20

50%

50%

15

15

30

30

46 35 75

3 400 m 20 50% 10 50% 10 20

No ofEngage-ments

–

6

4



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-29


Double Figure 111. Up and hold.2. MPI of each burst to be sig-nalled, (2 x bursts).


Up Down00 1:01

Up and hold.


As for Practice1.

As for Practice 1.


As for Practice2.

As for Practice 2.


As for Practice1.

As for Practice 1.

6 300 m Triple Figure 11

Up Down05 0913 1722 2634 3844 4854 58

Fall when hit.


As for Practice1.

As for Practice 1.


Up Down05 1045 501:10 1:151:55 2:00

Fall when hit.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-30

LMG APWT(CI) AND APWA(CI)



a. APWT(CI). LMG APWT(CI) is to be fired annually by all combat infantry-men whose personal weapon is the LSW.

b. APWA(CI). Practices 1, 2 and 3 of LMG APWT(CI) are to be fired annu-ally by combat infantrymen whose alternate personal weapon is the LMG.

APWT0102. Ranges. LMG APWT(CI)/APWA(CI) can be fired on an ETR orCGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to AMS the firing point monitorsare to be positioned where the firers cannot view them.

APWT0103. Range Rigging. CGRs and ETRs are to be rigged as follows:

a. CGR Right Coffin — Triple Figure 11 } In eachLeft Coffin — Double Figure 11 } lane

b. ETR 200 m — Double Figure 11300-400 m — Triple Figure 11

c. AMS Ranges 200 m — AMS Double Figure 11300-400 m — AMS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11

image on monitor

APWT0104. Timings. It will take approximately 45 minutes to complete all prac-tices of APWT(CI) and approximately 35 minutes to complete the required APWA(CI)practices.

APWT0105. Rules.




d. Rounds may not be carried forward from one practice to another.

e. Ammunition allocation for APWA(CI) includes 15 rounds for registrationfrom which 5 rounds are to be fired at each range prior to starting practices.

APWT0106. Time Charts. Time charts for the APWT and APWA are includedafter the Practice Details.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-31




APWT0108. Scoring.

Practices 1 and 4 (200 m only) — One point per hit

Practices 2, 3 and 4 (400 and 300 m) — 5 points per effective engagement

APWT0109. Standard. To achieve the required standard the firer must achievethe OMS at each firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMSat any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the prac-tices or part of the practice at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need tobe fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for theareas of weakness, before re-testing.

a. APWT(CI).

Marksman — 110. To qualify for Marksman all practices must befired. Soldiers who qualify as Marksmen are eligible to wear the badge for1 year before they must requalify.

b. APWA(CI).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-32

Ser Range TotalRounds % Hits/

SuccessfulEngagements

Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement(SUSAT)

1 200 m 40 70% 28 40

2

3

300 m

400 m

50

40

70%

50%

35

20

50

40

No ofEngage-ments

–

10

8

Ser Range TotalRounds % Hits/


Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement(SUSAT or Iron Sights)

1 200 m 20 50% 10 20

2

3

300 m

400 m

30

20

50%

50%

15

10

30

20

No ofEngage-ments

–

6

4

OMS Requirement(Iron Sight)

% Hits/Successful

EngagementsScore

50%

50%

50%

20

25

20


Preliminaries

APWT0110. Conduct. Unlike previous AWAs the current assessments are mod-ular in concept, in that the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance.Therefore qualification is no longer based upon a percentage of the HPS of the entiretest, but instead by achieving a percentage of the HPS at each firing distance.

APWT0111. On a firer’s first attempt of the relevant AWA all practices should be firedconsecutively, irrespective of each firer’s success or failure at any particular firing dis-tance. A example of which could be that a firer achieves a pass at 200 and 400 metres,but fails at 300 metres. In this case the scores at 200 metres and 400 metres, wherethe OMS was achieved, would be recorded as a pass and need not be fired again.

APWT0112. Firers are required to re-shoot all of the practices or parts of the prac-tice at the firing distance where they failed to achieve the pass percentage shown inthe table on the previous page.

APWT0113. Whilst it is not mandatory for firers to qualify at each firing distance onthe same day, the entire AWA should be successfully completed within a sensibletime.

APWT0114. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels forobstructions).


Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-33



200 mProne

1. Defence 20rounds


1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 20 rounds inbursts.4. Targets up andhold.

2. EnemyCounter Attack

300 mProne

30rounds

1. Triple Figure 11.2. 6 x 3 secondexposures with

1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watch

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-34



2. EnemyCounter Attack(cont)

irregular intervalsover a period ofone minute.

and Shoot”.3. Fire one burst of3-5 rounds at eachexposure.4. Targets fall whenhit.

3. Defence 400 mProne

20rounds

1. Triple Figure 11.2. 4 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervalsover a period oftwo minutes.

1. Firer in the nomi-nated position.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burst of3-5 rounds at eachexposure.4. Targets fall whenhit.

4. Attack a. 400 mProne

b. 300 mProne

c. 200 mProne

20rounds

20rounds

20rounds

1. Triple Figure 11at 400 and 300metres.2. 1 x 45 secondexposure at 400and 300 metres.3. Double Figure11 at 200 metres.4. 1 x 24 secondexposure followedby 3 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervalsover a one minuteperiod at each dis-tance.

1. Firer in the proneposition at 500metres, gun loadedwith 20 rounds and20 rounds in thepouch.2. Order “Watch out– Advance”. Firersare to advance at thewalk.3. When the firersare 35 metres fromthe firing point theRCO is to signal thetargets to be raised.4. The appearanceof the targets is thesignal for the firers torun to the 400 metrefiring point, adopt thenominated position,make ready and fire20 rounds in burstsof 3-5 rounds.5. When the targetsgo down order

“Prepare to Move”,the firers are to


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 5-35



4. Attack (cont) make safe with a 20round belt.6. Order “Watch out– Advance”. Firersare to advance at thewalk.7. Repeat the proce-dure at 300 and 200metres.8. Targets at 400 and300 metres fall whenhit. Targets at 200metres are up andhold.

LMG APWT — TIME CHART

One extra second has been included for target movement.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED5-36

Practice Range/Target Timings RemarksUp Down05 1:06


Up and hold.


Up Down05 0913 1722 2631 3545 4956 1:00

Fall when hit.


Up Down05 1045 501:10 1:151:55 2:00

Fall when hit.

4a 400 mTriple Figure 11

Up Down00 46

1. RCO will signal for exposure.2. Up and hold.

4b 300 mTriple Figure 11

As forPractice 4a

As for Practice 4a.

4c 200 m Double Figure 11

Up Down00 2533 3843 4855 1:00

1. RCO will signal for first expo-sure.2. Fall when hit.

Chapter 6

THE PISTOL

Scope

0601. Chapter 6 sets out all Pistol live fir-ing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMTStages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the BattleShot. It includes the application of thelessons to all Arms and Services and theprogression and frequency with which theyare to be fired.

0602. This progression and frequency offiring is essential for preparing soldiers forPistol Annual Personal Weapon Test(APWT) in LFMT Stage 3.

Pistol Users

0603. Categories. There are twobasic categories of Pistol user1:

a. Personal Weapon Users. ThePersonal Weapon User includesthose regular and TA soldiers from allArms and Services, in headquarters, other staffs and units, issued with a Pistolas their personal weapon.

b. Alternate Personal Weapon Users. The Alternate Personal WeaponUser includes those regular and TA Infantrymen in certain appointments with-in units, issued with a Pistol as their alternate personal weapon.

Note: These categories do not include those personnel on special dutieswho train with and use the Pistol for special duties and operations.

0604. Conditions. Both types of Pistol user are to complete initial and annual LFlessons and tests in order to meet the weapon requirements of LFMT Stages 1 and2 of Training the Battle Shot and to ensure the LFMT Stage 3 WHTs andAPWT/APWA can be completed successfully.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-1

CONTENTS

SCOPE 6-1

PISTOL USERS 6-1


SAFETY 6-3

RANGES 6-4




WHTs 6-7

LF LESSON 1 6-11LF LESSON 2 6-15LF LESSON 3 6-17LF LESSON 4 6-19LF LESSON 5 6-23

APWT/APWA 6-27


0605. Personal Weapon User — Initial Training. All Arms and Services per-sonnel whose personal weapon is the Pistol are to complete the following LF lessonsas their initial training:

0606. Personal Weapon User — Annual Training. Having carried out the initialtraining stipulated in Paragraph 0606 above, all Arms and Services personnel whosepersonal weapon is the Pistol are to carry out the following LF lessons annually:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-2

Pistol LFLesson No Content Page No


1 Introductory Shoot and Grouping at 10 metres 6-11 to 6-14


3 Grouping from Other Positions 15-25 metres 6-17 to 6-18


4 Snap Shooting 6-19 to 6-22

5 Advanced Snap Shooting 6-23 to 6-26






4

5

Snap Shooting 6-19 to 6-22

Advanced Snap Shooting 6-23 to 6-26

0607. Alternate Personal Weapon User — Initial Training. All Arms andServices personnel whose alternate personal weapon is the Pistol are to completethe following LF lessons as their initial training:

0608. Alternate Personal Weapon User — Annual Training. Having carriedout the initial training stipulated in Paragraph 0607 above, All Arms and Services per-sonnel whose alternate personal weapon is the Pistol are to carry out the followingLF lessons annually:

Safety


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-3



1 Introductory Shoot and Grouping at 10 metres 6-11 to 6-14











Ranges

0610. All Pistol LF lessons should be conducted on a 25 m Range or 25 m BarrackRange.




Pistols with holsters As requiredMagazines 2 per pistolCleaning rods 1 per pistolCleaning materials As requiredIssued, serviceable hearing protection 1 per soldierHelmets Combat 1 per soldierCombat Body Armour (where issued) 1 per soldierPersonal Shooting Record Card (AF B6994A/B) 1 per soldierCoaches Aide Memoire (AF B71158) 1 per coachFirst aid kit CompleteStopwatches As required

0613. Dress. Dress for Pistol LF lessons should include belt order webbing,including a pistol holster. Combat helmets and Combat Body Armour (where issued)are to be worn for all LF lessons.


a. Where possible, pistols are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to therange to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those thatmay be experienced on the range.

b. Check each soldier has the issue, serviceable hearing protection and hisshooting record card in his possession.

c. Pistols may only be fired if the ‘Safety Catch’ and ‘Half Bent’ checks havebeen successfully completed immediately prior to live firing (see paragraph LF0107 on page 6-12).

d. Observation of the fall of shot is obvious at short ranges (10 – 25 metres).During grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to takethe correct point of aim (POA) for each shot and avoid aiming off.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-4

0615. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be bottomcentre of the patch.

0616. Coaching. Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle5.56 mm Modified L85A2, Light Support Weapon Modified L86A2 and AssociatedEquipments (Army Code No. 71753), Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pamphlet No. 6, The 5.56 mm Rifle and Light Support Weapon (LSW), (Army CodeNo. 71374) and Pamphlet No. 10, Pistol, Automatic, 9 mm, L1A1 (Army Code No.71029) contain full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensureare:



c. All group sizes, Mean Points of Impact (MPI), POAs for all positions andscores are to be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record cards.

d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during snapshooting prac-tices.

0617. Spotters. When grouping, to enable firers and coaches to gain the maxi-mum benefit from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employedas spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximumvalue from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportuni-ty to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.

0618. Standards. Soldiers who do not attain the required standards should begiven further coaching before firing again.





c. Pack kit.

d. Summary of the standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, fore-cast of the next LF lesson.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-5




a. Soldiers in regular and TA units whose personal weapon is the Pistol areto complete their tests every six months; those allocated a Pistol as an alter-nate personal weapon are to complete the tests once a year. All tests are to becarried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, current and competentinstructor.



0624. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combathelmet and combat body armour (CBA) where issued.






0626. Training Performance Standards. The Training Performance Standardsto be achieved for each weapon are:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-6

Pistol as Personal Weapon Skilled

Pistol as Alternate Personal Weapon Average

WHTs PISTOL

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-7


1 Safety Unloadedpistol lying incorner ofroom.

1. Order the soldier to fetchthe pistol. The soldier, with-out further direction, is to:

a. Pick up the pistol andprove that it is unloaded,by removing the magazineand pulling back the slideto check the chamber. b. Replace the magazineto ease springs.

2. Order the soldier to handover the pistol. The soldieris to point the muzzle in asafe direction, remove themagazine, pull back theslide, show the chamberclear and ease springs.



Pistolunloaded,cleaning kitbox, flan-nelette andcleaning rags,cleaning rod,oil.

1. Standard:Skilled — Nomistakes. Average — 1to 3 mistakes.Fail — Morethan 3 mis-takes.2. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

1. Order the soldier to stripthe pistol as for daily clean-ing. Ask the following ques-tions:

a. What size flannelette isused to clean the barreland chamber?b. What size flannelette isused to oil the barrel andchamber?c. What are the differ-ences to normal dailycleaning when in the fol-lowing conditions?(choose any 2 conditions)

(1) Wet conditions.(2) Dry, sandy or dustyconditions.(3) Cold and extremecold conditions.(4) Hot, wet conditions.

d. What materials are pro-vided for cleaning the pis-tol?

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-8


3 MagazineFilling

Magazine, 13drill rounds

The soldier will fill the maga-zine by hand with 13 drillrounds.

Instructor’s Note: Leave themagazine filled.

No time limit.

4 Pistol Drill Pistol, onemagazinecontainingone drillround, onemagazinefilled with drillrounds.

1. Standard:Skilled — Allactions correct. Average — 1or 2 mistakes.Fail — Morethan 2 mis-takes.2. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

Pistol and magazine in theholster. Order “Load –Ready”.

Instructor’s Note: The sol-dier is to load with the mag-azine containing one round.

5 HandlingandStoppages

Pistol loadedand readywith one drillround, theother maga-zine with drillrounds in theholster, repre-sentative tar-get.

1. Standard:Skilled — Allactions correct. Average — 1or 2 mistakes.Fail — Morethan 2 mis-takes.2. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

1. Order “Fire”.2. As soon as the trigger isoperated, order “Pistolwon’t fire”.3. When the soldier carriesout the IA, order “Emptymagazine”.4. On the trigger being oper-ated, order “Won’t fire”.5. On the IA being carriedout, order “Rounds inmagazine — body andchamber clear”.6. On the trigger being oper-ated, order “Won’t fire”.7. On the IA being carriedout, order “Obstruction inthe body”.8. On the trigger being oper-ated, order “Stop — makesafe”.

2. Order the soldier toassemble the pistol and testthe safety catch and halfbent.

2(cont)

LF Lessons 1 – 5

0627. The details of LF lessons 1 – 5 and the APWT/APWA are contained in theremaining pages of this chapter. Each lesson is contained in separate pages for easyuse.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-9


6 Unloading Loaded pistolin the holster,empty maga-zine in theholster.

Order “Unload”. 1. Standard:Skilled — Allactions correct. Average — 1or 2 mistakes.Fail — Morethan 2 mis-takes.2. Award noqualification ifany mistakeaffects safety.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-10

PISTOL LF 1. — INTRODUCTORY SHOOT AND GROUPING AT 10 METRES


LF0101. Aim. To teach how to prepare pistols for firing, to confirm that the soldiercan aim, hold and fire the pistol and how to clean the pistol after firing.


LF0103. Stores.

Normal ranges stores1 x witness screen with 2 x 75 mm x 100 mm aiming marks per firer20 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries


LF0105. Preparing the Pistol for Firing. Explain and demonstrate:

a. Strip the pistol as for daily cleaning, clean it.

b. Inspect the parts to make certain they are serviceable.

c. In those conditions where oiling is permitted, lightly oil the following:

(1) The guide grooves and rib on the body within which the slidesmoves.

(2) A very slight amount in the trigger mechanism and the hammerswivel pin.

(3) The guide grooves on the slide.

(4) The outside of the barrel (except the bullet guide).

(5) The main spring guide and main spring.

(6) The inside of the slide (except the face of the breech).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-11

d. Assemble the pistol. Hand operate the slide several times to ensure thatthe action works smoothly.

e. Make certain that the outside of the pistol is always dry.

f. Strip, clean and leave dry both magazines.

LF0106. Confirmation. Confirm by practice.

LF0107. Safety. Pistols may only be fired if the “Safety Catch” and “Half Bent”checks have been successfully completed immediately prior to live firing. Explainand demonstrate: Test the functioning as follows:

a. The Safety Catch.

(1) Cock the pistol.

(2) Fit an empty magazine.

(3) Apply the safety catch.

(4) Press the trigger two or three times — the hammer should not goforward.

(5) Disengage the safety catch, press the trigger — the hammer shouldgo forward.

b. The Half Bent.

(1) The half bent is a safety device designed to prevent a loaded pistolfrom being fired accidentally should it be dropped. To test it, ensure anempty magazine is fitted, press back on the front of the slide; after about15 mm of movement the hammer should remain back, cocked on the halfbent when the slide is released. With the hammer in this position pressthe trigger — the hammer should remain back.

(2) Fully cock the pistol by drawing the hammer right back, press thetrigger — the hammer should fall.

(3) NEVER use the half bent as a safety catch.

c. If any of these tests fail, the pistol is to be repaired by an armourer.

LF0108. Confirmation. Confirm by practice.

LF0109. Range Safety and Discipline. Explain and demonstrate that as the pis-tol can be easily discharged in a wrong direction, the following rules are to apply toall range firing:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-12

a. Always keep the pistol in its holster (where issued) until on the firing point.

b. When in the ‘alert’ position, never turn round to talk to the safety supervi-sor or coach.

c. The drill for drawing pistols, loading, unloading etc, will be strictly enforced.Keep the pistol pointing towards the target while clearing a stoppage.

d. Indiscriminate snapshooting is forbidden.

e. Coaches are to stand so that they are looking over the firer’s left shoulder.

f. No one must stand near the right shoulder of the firer from the moment“Load” is given until the order “Ease Springs” has been actioned.

LF0110. Confirmation. Confirm by questions and practice.

LF0111. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Practice Details


Standards

LF0113. The average group size that should be achieved in the repeat practice is180 mm.


LF0114. Equipment Damage. Sharp tools are NOT to be used to remove carbonfouling. Scotchbright pads only may be used to clean stubborn carbon fouling fromthe breech face. They are NOT to be used to clean any other part of the pistol.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-13


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup at eachaiming mark.2. Discuss thegroups and recordthe group sizes.3. Repeat thepractice.


10 mStanding

20rounds

1 x screen with 2x 75 mm x 100mm aiming marks

LF0115. Cleaning after Firing. Explain and demonstrate:

a. Carry out NSPs, strip the pistol and magazines.

b. The bore is easier to clean immediately after firing while the barrel is stillwarm. If this is not possible, thoroughly oil the bore to assist later cleaning. Atthe appropriate time clean the barrel as taught and, except in sandy conditions,leave it oiled.

c. With an oily rag, wipe off all fouling from the inside of the slide, particular-ly the face of the firing pin hole.

d. Clean the magazines inside and out.

e. Assemble the pistol and the magazines, then test the functioning.

LF0116. Care after Firing. Explain:

a. Under normal circumstances the bore must be thoroughly cleaned,inspected and re-oiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the pistolhas been fired.

b. In very dusty conditions pistols must be dry cleaned and inspected daily. Ifoil has to be used to remove rust, use it sparingly and remove all traces after-wards.

LF01117. Confirmation. Confirm by questions and practice.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-14

PISTOL LF 2. — ZEROING AT 15 METRES

A. INSTRUCTORS NOTES

LF0201. Aim. To zero the pistol by superimposing the soldier’s MPI on theCorrect Zero Position (CZP) by sight adjustment.


LF0203. Stores.

Normal range storesSight adjustment tools and spare sights1 x witness screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm aiming mark per firer25 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer


a. Firers must achieve a 400mm group with 20 rounds from the standing posi-tion at 15 metres during Practice 1 before their sights are adjusted.

b. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and soldiers (where applicable) are tobe fully conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume II, Pamphlet No.10, Pistol Automatic 9 mm L1A1, (Army Code No. 71029), relating to Zeroing.


Preliminaries


LF0206. Range Safety Rules.

a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (seeReference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Revise pistol range safety and discipline (seeLF Lesson 1).

b. Pistols may only be fired if the “Safety Catch” and “Half Bent” checks havebeen successfully completed immediately prior to live firing (see LF Lesson 1).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-15

Practice Details


Standards

LF0208. A group size of 270 mm in Practice 2 is the acceptable standard.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-16


1. Fire 4 x 5round groups atthe same aimingmark.2. Firer is tobreak the positionafter each group.3. Measure thesize of the group.4. Identify theMPI and adjust forzero if necessary.


20rounds


2. CheckGroup

15 mStanding

5rounds


1. Fire a 5 roundcheck group toconfirm zero.2. If the correctzero is notachieved thenrepeat Practice 1using the groupplus a further 15rounds.

PISTOL LF 3. — GROUPING FROM OTHER POSITIONS 15–25 METRES


LF0301. Aim. To practise soldiers in grouping from the standing, kneeling andsitting positions at ranges up to 25 metres.


LF0303. Stores.

Normal range stores2 x Figure 11 per firer each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned withthe bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the target30 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries



a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (SeeReference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Revise pistol range safety and discipline (seeLF Lesson 1).


Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-17


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup from eachposition at sepa-rate targets.2. Discuss thegroups, position ofthe MPI, note any

1. Grouping 15 mStanding and

Kneeling

10rounds

2 x Figure 11

Standards

LF0307. The acceptable standards are as follows:

Practice 1 Standing — An average group size of 270 mm.Kneeling — An average group size of 270 mm.

Practice 2 Standing — An average group size of 360 mm.Kneeling — An average group size of 360 mm.

Practice 3 Standing — An average group size of 450 mm.Sitting — An average group size of 450 mm.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-18


adjustments need-ed to the POA,record the groupsizes.

1. Grouping(cont)


Kneeling

10rounds

2 x Figure 11 1. Fire a 5 roundgroup from eachposition at sepa-rate targets.2. Discuss thegroups, position ofthe MPI, note anyadjustments need-ed to the POA,record the groupsizes.


Sitting

10rounds

2 x Figure 11 1. Fire a 5 roundgroup from eachposition at sepa-rate targets.2. Discuss thegroups, position ofthe MPI, note anyadjustments need-ed to the POA,record the groupsizes.

PISTOL LF 4. — SNAP SHOOTING


LF0401. Aim. To practise snap shooting at a single fleeting enemy from thestanding, kneeling and sitting positions at ranges up to 25 metres.


LF0403. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x Stopwatch2 x Figure 11 per firer36 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries





LF0406. Miscellaneous. If swivel mechanisms are not available, exposure timesare to be controlled using whistle blasts. A short whistle blast signifying the beginningand a long whistle blast, the end of each exposure.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-19

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-20


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 2 roundsat the left target ineach exposure.4. Return to thealert position aftereach exposure.5. Repeat thepractice in thekneeling positionat the right target.6. Record thescores.

1. Snap 15 mStanding and

Kneeling

12rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 3 x 5 secondexposures withintervals ofbetween 5–10seconds.


Kneeling

12rounds


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 2 roundsat the left target ineach exposure.4. Return to thealert position aftereach exposure.5. Repeat thepractice in thekneeling positionat the right target.6. Record thescores.


Sitting

12rounds


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 2 roundsat the left target ineach exposure.

Practice Details


Scoring

LF0408. 1 point per hit.

Standards

LF0409. HPS — 36

Pass — 23 (Personal Weapon)— 18 (Alternate Personal Weapon)


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-21


4. Return to thealert position aftereach exposure.5. Repeat thepractice in the sit-ting position at theright target.6. Record thescores.

3. Snap(cont)

PISTOL LF 4. — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-22


Reset watch andrepeat the practice.

1 UP DOWN05 1117 2331 37

15 m2 x Figure 11

2 20 m2 x Figure 11

As for Practice 1 Reset watch andrepeat the practice.

3 25 m2 x Figure 11

As for Practice 1 Reset watch andrepeat the practice.

PISTOL LF 5. — ADVANCED SNAP SHOOTING


LF0601. Aim. To practise soldiers in snap shooting against more than oneenemy and in taking up an alternate fire position at ranges up to 25 metres.


LF0603. Stores.

Normal range stores 1 x Stopwatch2 x Figure 11 per firer32 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries





Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-23


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. In each doubleexposure the fireris to fire 1 round


Kneeling

12rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 3 x doubleexposures of thetarget.3. In each doubleexposure the tar-get is up for 5seconds, down

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-24


at each targetfrom the standingposition, thenadopt the kneelingposition and fire afurther round ateach target.4. Between doubleexposures order“Adopt thestanding alertposition”.5. Record thescores.

1. Snap(cont)

for 6 seconds andup for 5 seconds.

2. Rapid 20 mStanding and

Kneeling

8rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure fol-lowed 10 sec-onds later by 1 x16 second expo-sure.

1. Firer in thestanding positionon the 25 m point,made safe withthe pistol in thefastened holster.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal for thefirer to run ontothe 20 m firingpoint, draw the pis-tol and make ready.4. 10 secondsafter the initialexposure therewill be one expo-sure of 16 sec-onds, fire 4 roundsfrom the standingposition at the lefttarget then adoptthe kneeling posi-tion and fire a fur-ther 4 rounds atthe right target.5. Record thescores.

Scoring

LF0607. 1 point per hit.

Standards

LF0608. HPS — 32

Pass — 21 (Personal Weapon)— 16 (Alternate Personal Weapon)


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-25


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. In each doubleexposure the fireris to fire oneround at each tar-get from thestanding position,then adopt thekneeling positionand fire a furtherround at each tar-get.4. Between dou-ble exposuresorder “Adopt thestanding alertposition”.5. Record thescores.


Kneeling

12rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 3 x doubleexposures of thetarget.3. In each doubleexposure the tar-get is up for 5seconds, down for6 seconds and upfor 5 seconds.

PISTOL LF 5 — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-26


Reset watch andrepeat twice.

1 UP DOWN05 1117 23

15 m2 x Figure 11

2 20 m2 x Figure 11

UP DOWN05 0717 34

3 25 m2 x Figure 11

As for Practice 1 Reset watch andrepeat twice.

PISTOL APWT/APWA



a. APWT. Pistol APWT is to be fired annually by all personnel whose per-sonal weapon is the Pistol.

b. APWA. Practices 1, 3, and 4 of Pistol APWT are to be fired by all com-bat infantrymen whose alternate personal weapon is the Pistol.

APWT0102. Ranges. Pistol APWT and APWA can be fired on a 25 m Range ora 25 m Barrack Range.


APWT0104. Rules.

a. Dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order web-bing including pistol holster, combat helmet, combat body armour (whereissued) and issued, serviceable hearing protection.


c. Coaching is not permitted.

APWT0105. Time Charts. Time charts to assist range staff are included after thePractice Details.


a. APWT — 32 rounds.

b. APWA — 24 rounds.

APWT0107. Magazines.

a. APWT — Four magazines of 8 rounds are to be used.

b. APWA — Three magazines of 8 rounds are to be used.

APWT0108. Scoring. One point per hit.

APWT0109. Standard. To achieve the required standard the firer must achievethe OMS at each firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMSat any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the prac-

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-27

tices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firerswho fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness,before re-testing.

a. APWT.

Marksman. To qualify as a Marksman all practices are to be completedand the firer must achieve a score of 27 (85%) or more of the total HPS(32) for the entire shoot. Soldiers who qualify as Marksmen are entitled towear the Marksman badge for one year then they must requalify.

b. APWA.


Preliminaries

APWT0110. Conduct. Unlike previous AWAs the current assessments are mod-ular in concept, in that the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance.Therefore qualification is no longer based upon a percentage of the HPS of the entiretest, but instead by achieving a percentage of the HPS at each firing distance. Thefollowing guidance on range conduct is given for the RCOs:

a. The AWAs may be conducted in one of two ways:

(1) Option 1. Each detail completes the entire shoot.

(2) Option 2. All details complete the 15 metre practices, then 20metres, then the 25 metres.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-28


% Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 15 m 16 80% 13 16

2

3

20 m

25 m

8

8

70%

50%

6

4

8

8


% Hits Score

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)

OMS Requirement

1 15 m 8 65% 5 8

2

3

20 m

25 m

8

8

50%

40%

4

3

8

8

b. On a firer’s first attempt of the relevant AWA where Option 1 is used allpractices, less LNV, should be fired consecutively, irrespective of each firer’ssuccess or failure at any particular firing distance. A example of which could bethat a firer achieves a pass at 15 and 25 metres, but fails at 20 metres. In thiscase the scores at 15 metres and 25 metres, where the OMS was achieved,would be recorded as a pass and need not be fired again.

c. Firers are required to re-shoot all of the practices at the firing distancewhere they failed to achieve the pass percentage shown in the table on the pre-vious page.

d. Whilst it is not mandatory for firers to qualify at each firing distance on thesame day, the entire AWA should be successfully completed within a sensibletime.


APWT0112. Range Safety Rules.

a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (seeReference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Revise pistol range safety and discipline.

b. Pistols may only be fired if the “Safety Catch” and “Half Bent” checks havebeen successfully completed immediately prior to live firing.

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-29


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. At each doubleexposure the fireris to fire oneround at the targetfrom the standingposition thenadopt the kneelingposition and fire afurther round atthe target.


Kneeling

8rounds

1. 1 x Figure 11(left target).2. 4 x doubleexposures of thetarget.3. In each doubleexposure the tar-get is up for 3seconds, downfor 6 seconds andup for 5 secondswith irregularintervals betweendouble expo-sures.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-30


4. Between expo-sures order“Adopt thestanding alertposition”.5. Record thescores.

1. Snap(cont)

2. Snap (NBC) 15 mStanding

8rounds

1. 1 x Figure 11(right target).2. 4 x 5 secondexposures withintervals ofbetween 4-10seconds.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion, wearing res-pirator and gloves.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 2 rounds ateach exposure.4. Record thescores.


8rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure fol-lowed 10 sec-onds later by 3 x4 second expo-sures with irregu-lar intervals.

1. Firer in thestanding positionon the 25 m firingpoint, made safewith the pistol inthe fastened case.2. Order “Watchout”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal to runonto the 20 m fir-ing point, draw thepistol, make readyand adopt thenominated alertposition.4. Any number ofrounds may befired at each sub-sequent exposure,not more than 4rounds to count oneach target.5. Record thescores.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-31


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, ready,with the safetycatch applied.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 4 roundsfrom the standingposition at the lefttarget on the firstexposure thenadopt the kneelingposition and fire 4rounds at the righttarget on the sec-ond exposure.4. Record thescores.


Kneeling

8rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 2 x 8 secondexposures withan interval of 5seconds.

PISTOL APWT — TIME CHART

One extra second has been allowed for target movement.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-32


Reset watch andrepeat 3 times.

1 UP DOWN05 0915 21

15 m1 x Figure 11

2 15 m1 x Figure 11

UP DOWN05 1118 2429 3543 49

3 20 m2 x Figure 11

UP DOWN05 0717 2228 3337 42

4 25 m2 x Figure 11

UP DOWN05 1419 27

PISTOL APWA — TIME CHART

One extra second has been allowed for target movement.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 6-33


Reset watch andrepeat 3 times.

1 UP DOWN05 0915 21

15 m1 x Figure 11

2 20 m2 x Figure 11

UP DOWN05 0717 2228 3337 42

3 25 m2 x Figure 11

UP DOWN05 1419 27

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED6-34

CHAPTERS 7, 8 AND 9

RESERVED

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED

Chapter 10

TRANSITION TO LIVE FIRING TACTICAL TRAINING

Scope

1001. Chapter 10 sets out Stage 4 in theSystem for Training the Battle Shot —Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training(TLFTT). The shoots in this Stage are cen-tral to the successful transition from basicshooting standards achieved in Live FiringMarksmanship Training (LFMT) Stages 1to 3 to the more testing operational shoot-ing skills required by all Arms andServices.

1002. For the Infantry in particular, TLFTTprepares and trains soldiers for the LFTTexercises in which they will participate.

Completion of TLFTT Shoots

1003. Recommended Shoots. Com-pleting these shoots is recommended forall Arms and Services as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-1

CONTENTS

SCOPE 10-1

COMPLETION OF TLFTT SHOOTS 10-1

DETAILS OF TLFTT SHOOTS 10-2

APPLICATION OF TLFTT SHOOTS 10-3

OPERATIONAL SHOOTING SKILLS ANDTLFTT SHOOTS 10-4

FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS INSTRUCTION 10-5FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS ASSESSMENT 10-9FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS RIFLE/LSW

INSTRUCTION AND ASSESSMENT 10-13FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS LMG

INSTRUCTION AND ASSESSMENT 10-19FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS PISTOL

ASSESSMENT 10-25FIRING AT THE LNV RIFLE/LSW

INSTRUCTION AND ASSESSMENT 10-29FIRING AT THE LNV LMG INSTRUCTION

AND ASSESSMENT 10-35FIRING WITH CWS RIFLE/LSW ZEROING 10-39FIRING WITH CWS RIFLE/LSW ASSESSMENT 10-43FIRING WITH CWS LMG ZEROING 10-47FIRING WITH CWS LMG ASSESSMENT 10-49FIRING WITH NVS AND LA INTRODUCTION 10-53FIRING WITH NVS AND LA ZEROING 10-55FIRING WITH NVS AND LA ASSESSMENT 10-59AUTOMATIC FIRE INSTRUCTION 10-63AUTOMATIC FIRE ASSESSMENT 10-69FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (CI) ETR 10-75FIRE TEAM ASSSESSMENT (CI) GR 10-85FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (OA&SVCS) ETR 10-95FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (OA&SVCS) GR 10-101

Shoot Recommended For

Firing at Moving Targets All Arms and ServicesFiring in NBC Conditions All Arms and ServicesFiring at the LNV All Arms and ServicesFiring with CWS Infantry OnlyFiring with NVS and LA Infantry OnlyAutomatic Fire Infantry OnlyFire Team Assessments All Arms and ServicesIBSR Shoots As required

1004. Small Arms Trainer (SAT) and Dismounted Close Combat Trainer(DCCT). The Moving Targets and Automatic Fire shoots each include an instruc-tional shoot which is specifically designed to be fired on SAT/DCCT. The assess-ments for these shoots are also included on the SAT/DCCT software and may beused for remedial training or concurrent activity to a range or other period.

Details of TLFTT Shoots

1005. The details of TLFTT Shoots are located as shown below:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-2

Contents Page No

Firing at Moving Targets — Instructional Shoot on SAT/DCCTFiring at Moving Targets — Assessment

Firing with Common Weapon Sight — Rifle/LSW Zeroing/Registration (Daylight Shoot)Firing with Common Weapon Sight — Rifle/LSW Assessment

Automatic Fire — Instructional Shoot on SAT/DCCTAutomatic Fire — AssessmentFire Team Assessment (CI) — ETRFire Team Assessment (CI) — Gallery RangeFire Team Assessment (OA&Svcs) — ETR

10-5 10-9

10-39

10-43Firing with Common Weapon Sight — LMG Zeroing/Registration(Daylight Shoot)Firing with Common Weapon Sight — LMG Assessment

Firing with NVS and LA — Grouping and Zeroing at 100 metres Firing with NVS and LA — Assessment

Fire Team Assessment (OA&Svcs) — Gallery Range

10-47

10-49

10-5510-5910-6310-6910-7510-8510-95

10-101

Firing in NBC Conditions — Rifle/LSW Instructional Shoot andAssessmentFiring in NBC Conditions — LMG Instructional Shoot andAssessment

Firing at the LNV — Rifle/LSW Instructional Shoot and Assessment

Firing at the LNV — LMG Instructional Shoot and Assessment

Firing with NVS and LA — Introductory Shoot at 25 metres

10-13

10-19

10-29

10-35

10-53

Firing in NBC Conditions — Pistol Assessment 10-25

Application of TLFTT Shoots

1006. Firing at Moving Targets. Firing at Moving Target shoots are to be firedas follows and the results of Firing at Moving Targets — Assessment are to berecorded on the unit computer system:

a. During Other Arms Phase 1 Recruit Training and the Combat InfantrymansCourse (CIC) if no Mechanical Moving Target Trainer (MMTTR) is available,Firing at Moving Targets — Assessment may be fired using SAT/DCCT.

b. Annually by all Arms and Services personnel whose personal weapon isthe Rifle or LSW. For personnel in HQs and units, if no MMTTR is available,firing at Moving Targets — Assessment may be fired on SAT/DCCT.

1007. Firing in NBC Conditions. Firing in NBC Conditions shoots are to be firedas follows and the results of the Assessments are to be recorded on the unit com-puter system:

a. During Other Arms Phase 1 recruit training and the Combat InfantrymansCourse (CIC) using rifle.

b. Annually by all Arms and Services personnel using their personal weapon(Rifle/LSW/LMG).

1008. Firing at the LNV. Firing at the LNV shoots are to be fired as follows andthe results of the Assessments are to be recorded on the unit computer system:

a. During Other Arms Phase 1 recruit training and the Combat InfantrymansCourse (CIC) using rifle with SUSAT.

b. Annually by all Arms and Services personnel using their personal weapon(Rifle/LSW/LMG).

1009. Firing with CWS. CWS shoots are to be fired annually by all combatinfantrymen serving in regular and TA battalions or where on issue for operations.The results of Firing with CWS — Assessment are to be recorded on the unit com-puter system.

1010. Firing with HMNVS and LA. HMNVS and LA shoots (less the IntroductoryShoot) are to be fired annually by all combat infantrymen serving in regular and TAbattalions or where on issue for operations.The results of firing with HMNVS and LA— Assessment are to be recorded on the unit computer system.

1011. Automatic Fire. Automatic Fire shoots are to be fired by all Infantry sol-diers during the CIC and annually thereafter by all combat infantrymen whose per-sonal weapon is the Rifle. The results of Automatic Fire — Assessment are to berecorded on the unit computer system.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-3

1012. Fire Team Assessments. The firing conditions for Fire Team Assessmentson Electric Target Ranges (ETR) and Gallery Ranges differ. The date of firing is to berecorded on the unit computer system. Appropriate shoots are included in the FireTeam Assessment annexes:

a. Fire Team Assessment (CI) is to be fired during the CIC using the Rifleonly.

b. Fire Team Assessment (OA&Svcs) wherever possible is to be fired annu-ally by all Other Arms and Services personnel whose personal weapon is theRifle or LSW — less those personnel in headquarters and the training organi-sation.

1013. IBSR Shoots. IBSR shoots are to be fired by trainee Infantry soldiers dur-ing the CIC. Whilst not mandatory for Other Arms and Services they may be fired atthe discretion of COs and where ranges are available. Unit ammunition scales atChapter 8 do not include rounds for IBSR shoots.

Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots

1014. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details ofOperational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pagesof this chapter. Each practice is contained in separate pages for easy use.

1015. Dress. Should include belt order webbing. Combat helmets and combatbody armour (CBA) where issued are to be worn for all SAT/DCCT and LF lessons.For Firing in NBC Conditions shoots full IPE should be worn. The minimum NBCequipment for firing must be respirator and NBC gloves.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-4

FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS — INSTRUCTIONAL SHOOT ONSAT/DCCT


MT0101. Aim. To practise the methods of engaging crossing targets using SAT/DCCT.

MT0102. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using SAT/DCCT. Where nei-ther SAT nor DCCT are available the shoot may be conducted on a MMTTR.

MT0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour 10 minutes to com-plete all practices on SAT. Approximately 1 hour 30 minutes will be required for eachdetail if the lesson is to be fired live.

MT0104. Stores.


Normal range stores (MMTTR)1 screen per firer each with 2 x Figure 20 targets (outwards facing)120 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

MT0105. Miscellaneous.

a. Soldiers are to fire the SAT boresighting shoot prior to firing the practiceslisted below.

b. Prior to this lesson, soldiers are to be revised in ‘Firing at Crossing Targets’(see Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle 5.56 mmModified L85A2, Light Support Weapon Modified L86A2 and AssociatedEquipments 2001 (Army Code No. 71753) or Infantry Training,Volume II, Skill atArms, Pamphlet No. 6, 5.56 mm Rifle and Light Support Weapon (Army Code No.71374)).


Preliminaries

MT0106. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

MT0107. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules applicable to SAT/DCCT.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-5

Practice Details

MT0108. Practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-6


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Discuss theshoot, record thePOA.

1 50 mStanding

Unsupported

10rounds

1. Figure 20 on ascreen.2. 10 x exposures(5 x slow, fol-lowed by 5 xfast).

2 50 mKneeling

Unsupported

10rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 1 round ateach exposure.4. Discuss theshoot, record thePOA.

3 50 mStanding

Unsupported

20rounds

1. Figure 20 on ascreen.2. 10 exposures(5 x slow and 5 xfast) in randomorder.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 2 roundsat each exposure.4. Discuss theshoot, record thescores.

4 50 mKneeling

Unsupported

20rounds

1. Figure 20 on ascreen.2. 10 exposuresat the slowspeed.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to adopt

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-7


the nominatedposition, and fire 2rounds at eachexposure.4. Between expo-sures order“Adopt thestanding alertposition”.5. Discuss theshoot, record thescores.

4(cont)

5 100 mStanding

Unsupported

10rounds



6 100 mKneeling

Unsupported

10rounds



7 100 mStanding

Unsupported

20rounds

1. Figure 20 on ascreen.2. 10 exposures(5 x slow and 5 xfast) in randomorder.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 2 roundsat each exposure.4. Discuss theshoot, record thescores.

Scoring

MT0109. Practices 3, 4, 7 and 8 — 1 point per hit on the target.

Standards

MT0110. HPS — 80

Pass — 52


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-8


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to adoptthe nominatedposition, and fire 2rounds at eachexposure.4. Between expo-sures order “Adoptthe standing alertposition”.5. Discuss theshoot, record thescores.

8 100 mKneeling

Unsupported

20rounds

1. Figure 20 on ascreen.2. 10 exposuresat the slowspeed.

FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS — ASSESSMENT


MT0201. Aim. To practise and assess the soldier using the methods of engagingcrossing targets on the MMTT.

MT0202. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on an MMTTR. If no MMTTR isavailable, the shoot may be conducted using SAT/DCCT.

MT0203. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 50 minutes to complete allpractices.

MT0204. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x screen per firer with 2 x Figure 20 targets (outwards facing)Spotting discs72 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

MT0205. Miscellaneous. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTT, the range layoutand procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).


Preliminaries

MT0206. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

MT0207. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the rangesafety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Practice Details

MT0208. Practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-9

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-10


1. Firer in thestanding unsup-ported position.2. Fire 1 round ateach of the first 4exposures thenadopt the kneelingunsupported posi-tion and fire 1round at each ofthe remainingexposures.4. Each shot holeis to be indicatedby a spotting disc.5. Discuss theshoot.

Sighters 50 mStanding

Unsupportedand KneelingUnsupported

8rounds

1. Figure 20 on ascreen.2. 8 x exposuresin the followingorder:2 x slow,2 x fast,2 x slow,2 x fast.

1 50 mStanding

Unsupported

16rounds

1. Figure 20 on ascreen.2. 8 x exposures(4 x slow and 4 xfast) in randomorder.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 2 roundsat each exposure.4. Record thescores.

2 50 mKneeling

Unsupported

16rounds

1. Figure 20 on ascreen.2. 8 x exposuresat the slowspeed.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to adoptthe nominatedposition and fire 2rounds at eachexposure.4. Between expo-sures order”Adopt thestanding alertposition”.5. Record thescores.

Scoring

MT0209. 1 point per hit on the target.

Standards

MT0210. HPS — 64

Pass — 42

End of Range Procedure

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-11



3 100 mStanding

Unsupported

16rounds


4 100 mKneeling

Unsupported

16rounds



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-12

FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS — RIFLE/LSW INSTRUCTIONAL SHOOTAND ASSESSMENT


NBC0101. Aim. To practise and assess the soldier in engaging targets in NBCconditions by deliberate, snap and rapid shooting from the prone and kneelingunsupported and supported positions.

NBC0102. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR ifconverted to AMS, or a GR.

NBC0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete allpractices. If AMS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings.

NBC0104. Time Chart. A time chart for Practices 5 to 8 is included after the prac-tice details.

NBC0105. Stores.

Normal range storesGallery Range (Practices 1 to 4)1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 100 metres1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a1.220 m circle at 200 metresGallery Range (Practices 5 to 8)1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer1 x Figure 11 at 200 metres per firer

orAMS converted range1 x Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200 metres35 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

NBC0106. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum firers are towear respirator and NBC gloves.


Preliminaries

NBC0107. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-13

NBC0108. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Practice Details

NBC0109. Practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-14




5rounds



Unsupported

5rounds




5rounds

1igure 12 on ascreenorAMS Figure 11



Supported

5rounds



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-15




Unsupported

5rounds


6. Rapid 100 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 12orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 12 secondexposure

1. Fire in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Fiverounds rapid,Watch andShoot”.3. Fire five roundsat the exposure.4. Targets up andhold.


Supported

5rounds



8. Rapid 200 mProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11orAMS Figure 11.2. 1 x 12 secondexposures.

1. Fire in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “FiveRounds Rapid,Watch andShoot”.3. Fire five roundsat the exposure.4. Targets up andhold.

Scoring Practices 1 to 4

NBC0110. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of eachpractice.




NBC0111. All shots fired are to be signalled. As each shot arrives the target is low-ered immediately, a spotting disc is to be placed into the shot hole and the targetraised without delay. The marker paddle is to be used to point out the spotting disc’sposition and indicate the appropriate score. When the next shot arrives the target islowered immediately, the spotting disc moved to the latest shot hole position, the pre-vious shot hole is patched out and the target raised without delay and so on. The sug-gested signals are:




Wash-out — Black side of paddle waved from side to side across theface of the screen, then indicate the direction of the miss if known, using white side of paddle.

Scoring Practices 5 to 8

NBC0112. One point per hit.

NBC0113. Practices 1 to 4 — Instructional Shoot.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-16


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 100 m 10 60% 24 70% 28 40

2 200 m 10 50% 20 60% 24 40

44 52 80

Standards

NBC0114. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at eachfiring distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distancewill constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing dis-tances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are toundergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.

NBC0115. Practices 5 to 8 — Assessment.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-17


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 100 m 10 60% 6 70% 7 10

2 200 m 10 50% 5 60% 6 10

11 13 20

FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS — RIFLE/LSW ASSESSMENT —TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-18



100 mFigure 12

6 100 mFigure 12

UP DOWN05 18

Up and hold.

7 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1419 2832 4145 5459 1:08

Fall when hit.

8 200 mFigure 11

As for Practice 6. Up and hold.

FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS — LMG INSTRUCTIONAL SHOOTAND ASSESSMENT


NBC0201. Aim. To practise and assess soldiers in engaging targets in NBC con-ditions from the prone position.

NBC0202. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with orwithout AMS), an ETR if converted to AMS, or a GR.

NBC0203. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete allpractices.

NBC0204. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details.

NBC0205. Stores.


GR or CGR without AMS:2 x Double Fig 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer (200 m)1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer (300 m)CGR and ETR fitted with AMS:1 x Double Fig 11 per firer (200 m)1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer (300 m)

Ammuntion:150 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer

NBC0206. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum firers are towear respirator and NBC gloves.


Preliminaries

NBC0207. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels forobstructions).

NBC0208. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-19

Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-20


200 mProne


Double Figure 11on a screen

1. Fire two burstsof 3-5 rounds.2. MPI of eachburst to be sig-nalled. (See Note)

2. Timed 200 mProne

10rounds

1. Double Figure11 on a screen.2. 1 x 30 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 10 roundsin bursts of 3-5rounds.4. MPI to be sig-nalled at the endof the exposure.(See Note)5. Targets up andhold.


10rounds

Triple Figure 11on a screen

1. Fire two burstsof 3-5 rounds.2. MPI of eachburst to be sig-nalled. (See Note)

4. Timed 300 mProne

20rounds

1. Triple Figure11 on a screen.2. 1 x 30 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 10 roundsin bursts of 3-5rounds.4. MPI to be sig-nalled at the endof the exposure.(See Note)5. Targets up andhold.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-21


5. Rapid 200 mProne

20rounds

1. Double Figure11 on a screen.2. 1 x 60 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 20 roundsin bursts of 3-5rounds.4. Targets up andhold.

6. Snap 200 mProne

30rounds

1. Double Figure11 on a screen.2. 6 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervalsover one minute.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 3-5 rounds ateach exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

7. Snap 300 mProne

20rounds

1. Triple Figure11.2. 4 x 4 secondexposures atirregular intervals.


8. Snap 300 mProne

30rounds

1. Triple Figure11.2. 6 x 4 secondexposures withtirregular intervalsover one minute.


Scoring

NBC0210. Sighting practices are not scored.

Practices 2, 4, 5 and 6 — 1 point per hit.

Practices 7 and 8 — 5 points per effective engagement.

NBC0211. Practices 2 and 4 — Instructional Shoot.

Standards

NBC0212. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at eachfiring distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distancewill constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing dis-tances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are toundergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.

NBC0213. Practices 5 to 8 — Assessment.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-22


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 200 m 20 50% 10 70% 14 20

2 300 m 20 50% 10 70% 14 20

20 28 40


Iron Sight% Hits


IronSightScore

SUSAT% Hits


SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 200 m 50 50% 25 70% 35 50

2 300 m 50 50% 25 70% 35 50

50 70 100

No ofEngage-ments

–

10

FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS — LMG INSTRUCTION ANDASSESSMENT — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-23


Up and hold.5 UP DOWN05 1:06

200 mDouble Figure 11


UP DOWN05 1015 2021 2633 3844 4950 55

Fall when hit.




No time limit. 1. Up and hold.2. MPI of each burstto be signalled, (2 xbursts).


UP DOWN05 36

1. Up and hold.2. MPI to be signalledat end of exposure.


As for Practice 1. As for Practice 1.

As for Practice 2. As for Practice 2.300 mTriple Figure 11

4


UP DOWN05 1015 2026 3135 40

Fall when hit.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-24

FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS — PISTOL ASSESSMENT


NBC0301. Aim. To practise and assess soldiers in target engagement in NBCconditions from the standing and kneeling positions at ranges up to 25 metres.

NBC0302. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete allpractices.

NBC0303. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x Stopwatch2 x Figure 11 per firer18 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer


Preliminaries

NBC0304. Safety. Normal safety precautions

NBC0305. Range Safety Rules.



Practice Details


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-25


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion, wearing res-pirator and gloves.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.

1. Rapid 15 mStanding

6rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 1 x 12 secondexposure.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-26


3. Fire 6 roundsat the left target.4. Record thescores.

1. Rapid(cont)


6rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 3 x 7 secondexposures withintervals of 4 sec-onds.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition, wearingrespirator andgloves.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to adoptthe nominatedposition and firetwo rounds at theright target.4. Return to thestanding alertposition betweenexposures.5. Record thescores.


6rounds

1. 2 x Figure 11.2. 3 x 5 secondexposures withintervals of 4 sec-onds.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion, wearing res-pirator and gloves.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each target ineach exposure.4. Return to thealert positionbetween expo-sures.5. Record thescores.

Scoring

NBC0307. 1 point per hit.

Standards

NBC0308.HPS — 18

Pass — 11


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-27

FIRING IN NBC CONDITIONS — PISTOL ASSESSMENT —TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-28


1 UP DOWN05 18

15 m1 x Figure 11

2 20 m2 x Figure 11

UP DOWN05 1317 2529 37

3 25 m2 x Figure 11

UP DOWN05 1115 2125 31

FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY (LNV) —RIFLE/LSW INSTRUCTIONAL SHOOT AND ASSESSMENT


LNV0101. Aim. To practise and assess the methods of engaging targets at thelimit of night visibility (LNV).

LNV0102. Conduct. The lesson can be conducted on an ETR, CGR or GR.

LNV0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete allpractices. It may be necessary during Phase 1 training to allocate 1 x 40 minute peri-od by day for rehearsals.

LNV0104. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details.

LNV0105. Stores.

Normal range stores (including):Red Lamps as required by local range regulations1 x torch fitted with red filter per coach1 x whistle1 x Figure 11 stick-in target (draped) per firer (AMS Figure 11 if using an ETRwith AMS)30 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

LNV0106. Miscellaneous.

a. Before being trained to shoot at night, the soldier must be taught the nightvision lessons from Infantry Training, Volume 1, Pamphlet No. 2, Fieldcraft,Battle Lessons and Exercises (Army Code No 71717). The LNV is to be estab-lished using the sight to be used for the firing practice (see Chapter 4 ofReference A (Pamphlet No. 21)), however the maximum range at which theshoots are to take place is 100 metres.

b. Where necessary, the instructional phase of this lesson should be taughtor revised on the range while waiting for the correct light level. Range disciplineand night range procedures should then be explained and ‘walked through’before firing begins.

c. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggestedmethod is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with along blast.

d. LSW is to be fired bipod supported on practices using the prone postiion.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-29


Preliminaries

LNV0107. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

LNV0108. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

LNV0109. Establishing LNV. Using the most applicable method to suit the rangeestablish LNV. (See Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Night Shooting

LNV0110. Iron Sight. Explain and demonstrate by day:

a. Select the large aperture.

b. Observe the target with both eyes open.

c. Correctly position the butt in the shoulder and the cheek on the cheek piecewith the rifle angled down below the target.

d. Whilst initially observing the target with both eyes and looking over the topof the rear sight, start to raise the weapon until the TRILUX source is observedin the bottom of the field of view.

e. Continue to raise the weapon until the TRILUX source appears just belowthe POA and the rear aperture is presented in front of the right eye.

f. As the TRILUX source is about to coincide with the POA, close the left eye.

g. As soon as the TRILUX source is on the POA, squeeze the trigger.

LNV0111. SUSAT. Explain and demonstrate by day:

a. Ensure the range drum is set at the 300 metre range position.

b. Look through the sight and adjust the TRILUX brightness until the tip of thepointer is adequately illuminated.

c. Hold, aim and fire as for daylight shooting.

LNV0112. Confirmation. Confirm by practice.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-30

Practice Details

LNV0113. Practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-31


1. Fire in thenominated posi-tion.2. Fire fiverounds.3. Identify theMPI.

1. Deliberate LNVProne

5rounds

Figure 11 stick-in(draped).

2. Snap LNVProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11 stick-in (draped).2. 5 x 6 secondexposures withirregular intervalsbetween 5 and 10seconds.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watch,Listen andShoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Record thescores.

3. Snap LNVKneeling

Unsupported

5rounds

1. Figure 11 stick-in (draped).2. 5 x 6 secondexposures withirregular intervalsbetween 5 and 10seconds.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watch,Listen andShoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Record thescores.

4. Rapid LNVProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11 stick-in (draped).2. 1 x 15 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watch,Listen Out”.3. At the start ofthe exposure thefirer is to adoptthe prone positionand fire fiverounds rapid atthe exposure.4. Record thescores.

Scoring

LNV0114. One point per hit in Practices 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.

Standards

LNV0115. Instructional Practices 2, 3 and 4.

HPS — 15

Pass — 10 (Iron Sights and SUSAT)

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-32


1. Fire in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watch,Listen andShoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Record thescores.

5. Snap LNVKneeling

Unsupported

5rounds

1. Figure 11 stick-in (draped).2. 5 x 5 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

6. Rapid LNVProne

5rounds

1. Figure 11 stick-in (draped).2. 1 x 12 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watch,Listen Out”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to adoptthe prone positionand fire fiverounds rapid atthe exposure. 4. Targets do notfall when hit.5. Record thescores.

LNV0116. Assessment Practices 5 and 6. To achieve the required standard thefirer must achieve the OMS (see table below). Firers who fail are to undergo furtherpractice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-33


% HitsIron Sight

ScoreSUSAT% Hits

SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 LNV 10 60% 6 70% 7 10

FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY —RIFLE/LSW INSTRUCTION AND ASSESSMENT — TIME CHART

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-34


Up and hold.1 No time limitLNVFigure 11stick-in (draped)

2 LNVFigure 11stick-in (draped)

UP DOWN05 1119 2530 3645 5158 1:04

Up and hold.




UP DOWN05 21

Up and hold.


UP DOWN05 1015 2026 3137 4248 53

Up and hold.


UP DOWN05 17

Up and hold.

FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY —LMG INSTRUCTIONAL SHOOT AND ASSESSMENT


LNV0201. Aim. To practise and assess the soldiers in target engagement at theLNV.

LNV0202. Conduct. The lesson is only to be fired on an ETR (with or withoutAMS).

LNV0203. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete allpractices.

LNV0204. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details.

LNV0205. Stores.


GR or CGR without AMS:1 x Fig 11 per firer at LNV and 100 m1 x Double Fig 11 at 200 m

Ammuntion:90 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) per firer (see para LNV0209.

LNV0206. Miscellaneous.

a. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggestedmethod is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with along blast.

b. The LNV is to be established using the sight to be used for the firing prac-tice (see Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No 21)).


Preliminaries

LNV0207. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels forobstructions).

LNV0208. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-35

LNV0209. Use of Tracer. Check range orders for limitations on use of tracer atshort rangers.

Practice Details

LNV0210. The practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-36


1. Fire 10 roundsin bursts of 3-5rounds. 2. Assess thegroup.

1. Sighting LNVProne

10rounds

Figure 11

2. Timed LNVProne

20rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watch,Listen andShoot”.3. Fire 20 roundsin bursts of 3-5rounds.4. Targets up andhold.

3. Snap LNVProne

20rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watch,Listen andShoot”.3. Fire one burstof 3-5 rounds ateach exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.

4. Rapid LNVProne

20rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watch,Listen andShoot”.3. Fire 20 roundsin bursts of 3-5rounds.4. Targets up andhold.

Scoring

LNV0211. The sighting practice is not scored.

Practices 2 and 4 — 1 point per hit.

Practices 3 and 5 — 5 points per effective engagement.

Standards

LNV0212. Instructional Practices 2 and 3.

HPS — 40

Pass — 28 (Iron Sights and SUSAT)

LNV0213. Assessment Practices 4 and 5. To achieve the required standard thefirers must achieve the OMS (see table below).


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-37


5. Snap LNVProne

20rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watch,Listen andShoot”.3. Fire one burstof 3-5 rounds ateach exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.


Iron Sight% Hits


Iron SightScore

SUSAT% Hits


SUSATScore

HighestPossible

Score(HPS)


1 LNV 40 60% 24 70% 28 40

FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY —LMG INSTRUCTION AND ASSESSMENT — TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-38


Up and hold.1 No time limitLNVFigure 11

2 LNVFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1:06

Up and hold.

3 LNVFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1216 2328 3541 4852 59

Fall when hit.

4 LNVFigure 11


5 LNVFigure 11

UP DOWN04 1014 2025 3136 4246 52

Fall when hit.

FIRING WITH CWS — RIFLE/LSW ZEROING/REGISTRATION(DAYLIGHT SHOOT)


CWS0101. Aim. To zero/register the CWS to the firer’s personal weapon.

CWS0102. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on an ETR or ConvertedGallery Range (CGR )(with or without AMS) or a Gallery Range.

CWS0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes (Zeroing) or20 minutes (Registration) to complete all practices.

CWS0104. Stores.

Normal range stores1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer witha 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with the

bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figureor

1 x Figure 12d per firer (on AMS converted range)25 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Primary User)10 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Secondary User)

CWS0105. Miscellaneous.

a. This shoot should take place in daylight immediately before the night prac-tices in CWS Rifle/LSW Assessment.

b. The organisation of details will depend on the allocation of CWS within theunit. Soldiers who have been allocated the CWS as their personal equipment(Primary Users) should fire in the initial details. Soldiers who have not beenallocated a CWS (Secondary Users) should fire the registration practice in thelater details using a CWS from within their fire team.

c. LSW marksmen are to fire from the bipod supported position.

d. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and soldiers (when applicable) are tobe fully conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle 5.56 mm Modified L85A2, Light Support WeaponModified L86A2 and Associated Equipments (Army Code No. 71753) orInfantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 6, 5.56 mm Rifle andLight Support Weapon (Army Code No. 71374), relating to the CWS.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-39


Preliminaries

CWS0106. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

CWS0107. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Practice Details

CWS0108. Practice details are as follows:

a. Primary User (Zeroing).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-40


1. Fire 4 x 5round groups atthe same aimingmark.2. The firer is toapply the safetycatch, stand up,then re-adopt hisposition betweeneach group.3. Measure thesize of the group.4. Identify theMPI and adjust forzero if necessary.


20rounds

Figure 11 on ascreen

2. Checkgroup

5rounds


1. Fire a 5 roundcheck group toconfirm zero.2. If the correctzero is notachieved (seeRifle Lesson 16),repeat Practice 1using the groupplus a further 15rounds.3. Once zero isconfirmed recordsettings using theSAC.

b. Secondary User (Registration).

Standards

CWS0109. The 5 round group size that should be achieved is 150 mm.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-41


1. Fire a 5 roundgroup.2. Identify theMPI and the POAnecessary toapply fire to thecentre of the tar-get.3. Repeat thepractice.


100 mProne

10rounds


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-42

FIRING WITH CWS — RIFLE/LSW ASSESSMENT


CWS0201. Aim. To practise and assess soldiers in engaging an enemy at nightwith the CWS fitted to their personal weapon.

CWS0202. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on an ETR (with or withoutAMS), CGR or a Gallery Range.

CWS0203. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to completeall practices.

CWS0204. Stores.

Normal range stores including:Red lamps as required by local range regulations1 x torch per coach fitted with red filter1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100, 200 and 300 metres40 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Primary User)30 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Secondary User)


a. This shoot should be conducted immediately after the zeroing and regis-tration practices.

b. The conduct of the range period will depend on the allocation of CWS with-in the unit. Soldiers who have been allocated the CWS as their personal equip-ment (Primary Users) should fire the complete shoot in the initial details.Soldiers who have not been allocated a CWS (Secondary Users) should firePractices 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the later details using the sight they registered.

c. LSW marksmen are to fire from the bipod supported position.

d. Due to ‘tunnel vision’ at night, range conducting officers should ensure thattargets are identified to firers before firing at each range.

e. A time chart to assist range staff is at Page 7-20.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-43


Preliminaries

CWS0206. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

CWS0207. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Practice Details

CWS0208. Practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-44


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.5. Record thescores.

1. Snap 100 mStanding

Unsupported

5rounds

1. 1 x Figure 11.2. 5 x 5 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

2. Rapid 100 mSitting

Unsupported

10rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 10 roundsrapid at the expo-sure.4. Targets up andhold.5. Record thescores.


Supported

5rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.

Scoring

CWS0209. One point per hit.

Standards

CWS0210. HPS — 40 (Primary User)— 30 (Secondary User)

Pass — 24 (Primary User)— 15 (Secondary User)


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-45


4. Targets fallwhen hit.5. Record thescores.

3. Snap(cont)


10rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 10 roundsrapid at the expo-sure.4. Targets up andhold.5. Record thescores.


10rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.5. Record thescores.

FIRING WITH CWS — RIFLE/LSW ASSESSMENT —TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-46



100 mFigure 11

2 100 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 26

Up and hold.

3 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1219 2630 3743 5055 1:02

Fall when hit.

4 200 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 26

Up and hold.

5 300 mFigure 11

UP DOWN05 1219 2630 3743 5055 1:02

1:08 1:151:20 1:271:31 1:381:43 1:501:55 2:02

Fall when hit.

FIRING WITH CWS — LMG ZEROING/REGISTRATION(DAYLIGHT SHOOT)


CWS0301. Aim. To superimpose the soldiers Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on theCorrect Zero Position (CZP) using the CWS.

CWS0302. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with orwithout AMS), an ETR (if converted to AMS) or a GR.

CWS0303. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to completeall practices.

CWS0304. Stores.


1 x 1.220 m screens with Fig 11 per firer each with a 75 mm x 100 mmwhite patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure


Ammunition:25 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) per firer


a. This shoot should take place in daylight immediately before the night prac-tices in CWS LMG Assessment. Check Range Orders for details of live firingtimings.

b. Soldiers are to achieve a burst group size of 675 mm with 20 rounds inPractice 1 before sights are adjusted.

c. In Practice 2 the CWS is correctly zeroed if the distance from the CZP tothe MPI is within 50 mm.

d. Only the Gunner is to make adjustments to the CWS. Once the zero hasbeen confirmed the other fire team members are then to fire and record anyrequirement to aim off. This aim off distance must be recorded and confirmedby firing.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-47


Preliminaries

CWS0306. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels forobstructions).

CWS0307. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

Practice Details

CWS0308. The practice details are as follows:

Standard

CWS0309. A five round burst group size of 450 mm in Practice 2.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-48


100 mProne

1. Grouping 20rounds


orAMS Figure 12d

1. Fire 20 roundsin bursts of 3-5 atthe same aimingmark.Stand up afterevery secondburst.2. Discuss thegroup size andposition.3. Identify the MPIand adjust for zeroif necessary.

2. CheckGroup

100 mProne

5rounds


orAMS Figure 12d

1. Fire a fiveround burst todetermine MPI.2. If the correctzero is notachieved, repeatPractice 1 usingthe group plus afurther 15 rounds.

FIRING WITH CWS — LMG ASSESSMENT


CWS0401. Aim. To practice the soldiers in target engagement with the CWS atnight.

CWS0402. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with orwithout AMS), an ETR (if converted to AMS) or a GR.

CWS0403. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to completeall practices.

CWS0404. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.

CWS0405. Stores.

Normal range stores Targets:

1 x Fig 11 per firers at 100 m1 x Double Fig 11 per firer at 200 m

Ammunition:65 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link 4B/1T) per firer


a. Due to ‘tunnel vision’ at night, the RCO should ensure that targets are iden-tified to firers before firing at each range.

b. The RCO must be able to control practices. The use of a personal CWS,NVS is recommended.


Preliminaries

CWS0407. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels forobstructions).

CWS0408. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-49

Practice Details

CWS0409. The practice details are as follows:

Scoring

CWS0410. One point per hit in Practices 2 and 3.

Standard

CWS0411. HPS — 55

Pass — 27 (50%)


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-50


100 mProne


Figure 11 1. Fire 10 roundsin bursts of 3-5rounds.2. Assess thegroup.

2. Timed 100 mProne

20rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire 20 roundsin burst of 3-5rounds.4. Targets up andhold.

3. Timed 200 mProne

35rounds

1. Double Figure11.2. 7 x 3 secondexposures withirregular intervalsover a period oftwo minutes.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 3-5 rounds ateach exposure.4. Targets up andhold.

FIRING WITH CWS — LMG ASSESSMENT —TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-51


Figure 11Up and hold.

2 100 mFigure 11

Up Down05 51

Up and hold.


Up Down05 0925 2951 551:10 1:141:19 1:231:42 1:461:56 2:00

Up and hold.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-52

FIRING WITH NVS AND LA — INTRODUCTORY SHOOT AT25 METRES (DAYLIGHT)


LA0101. Aim. To confirm that the soldier can aim, hold and fire the rifle usingHMNVS and LA from the prone, kneeling, standing and patrol position.

LA0102. Firing Requirement. The Introductory Shoot is only fired during initialtraining.

LA0103. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETRwith screens placed 25 metres from firers.

LA0104. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete allpractices.

LA0105. Stores.


1 x witness screen with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks per firerAmmunition:

20 x 5.56 mm ball rounds per firer

LA0106. Miscellaneous.

a. Soldiers’ personal weapons are to be SUSAT/iron sight zeroed prior to thispractice.

b. Soldiers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an assis-tant, onto the CZP using the boresighting chart before Practice 1.

CONDUCT OF THE LESSON

Preliminaries

LA0107. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

LA0108. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the rangesafety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-53

Practice Details

LA0109. The practice details are as follows:

Standard

LA0110. The group sizes that should be achieved are:

Prone — 40 mm

Kneeling — 60 mm

Patrol Position — 115 mm


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-54


25 mProne

Kneeling andPatrol Positions

1. Grouping 1 x 20round

magazine


1. Fire a fiveround group fromprone and kneel-ing positions andfire 2 x 5 roundgroups from thepatrol position.2. Discuss thegroups and recordthe group sizes.

FIRING WITH NVS AND LA — GROUPING AND ZEROING AT100 METRES


LA0201. Aim. To superimpose the soldier’s Mean Point of Impact (MPI) onto theCorrect Zero Position (CZP) for the NVS & LA and host weapon.

LA0202. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on either a CGR (with or with-out AMS), an ETR (if converted to AMS) or a GR.

LA0203. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete allpractices.

LA0204. Stores.


1 x 1.220 m screen with Fig 12 per firer (1 x 1.220 m screen per firer on anETR or MMTTR) each with a 74 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned withthe bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the Fig 11 target at 100 metres

Ammunition:50 x 5.56 mm ball rounds per firer

LA0205. Miscellaneous.

a. Soldiers’ personal weapons are to be SUSAT/iron sight zeroed prior to thispractice.

b. Soldiers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an assis-tant, onto the CZP using the boresighting chart before Practice 1.

c. The NVS & LA CZP is the same CZP as the host weapon, i.e., L85A2 90mm above the point of aim and L86A2 80 mm above the point of aim.

d. In Practice 1 the weapon is correctly zeroed if the distance from the CZPto the MPI is 50 mm or less (PE).


Preliminaries

LA0206. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

LA0207. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the rangesafety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-55

Practice Details

LA0208. The practice details are as follows:

Standard

LA0209. The group sizes that should be achieved in Practices 1 and 2 (100metres) are:

Prone — 150 mm

Kneeling — 225 mm

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-56


100 mProne

1. CheckGroups

1 x 20round

magazine

Figure 12 on a1.220 m screen

1. Switch on reddot laser.2. Fire one groupof five rounds. 3. Identify the MPIand adjust red dotlaser for zero ifnecessary.4. Fire anotherfive round group ifnecessary.5. Switch on NVS,place in operatingposition and focusat 100 metres.6. Switch on IRlaser.7. Fire one groupof five.8. Identify the MPIand adjust LA forzero if necessary.9. Fire anotherfive round group ifnecessary.

2. RegisterPOA

100 mKneeling,

Standing PatrolPositions

1 x 30round

magazine

As for Practice 1 Fire a five roundgroup in each fir-ing position witheach laser todetermine POA.

Standing — 450 mm

Patrol Position — 450 mm


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-57

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-58

FIRING WITH NVS AND LA — ASSESSMENT


LAAWA0301. Aim. To practice and assess the soldier in engaging targets usingNVS and LA from the prone, kneeling and patrol position.

LAAWA0302. Conduct. The assessment is to be conducted on a CGR (with orwithout AMS), an ETR (with AMS) or a GR.

LAAWA0303. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to com-plete all practices.

LAAWA0304. Stores.


1 x Fig 11 per firer (200 metres)1 x Fig 12 per firer (100 metres)

AMS range:1 x Fig 12d per firer (100 metres)1 x Fig 11 per firer (200 metres)

Ammunition:35 x 5.56 mm ball rounds per firer (includes 5 rounds for sighters at 100 and200 metres)

LAAWA0305. Miscellaneous.

a. Soldiers’ personal weapons are to be SUSAT/Iron Sight zeroed perior tothis practice.

b. Soldiers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers with the aid of an assis-tant onto the CZP using the boresighting chart before Practice 1.

c. No extra time will be given for stoppages.


Preliminaries

LAAWA0306. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

LAAWA0307. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary therange safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-59

Practice Details

LAAWA0308. The practice details are as follows:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-60


Patrol Positionand

Prone

1. Snap/Rapid 10rounds

1. Figure 12.2. 1 x 20 secondexposure with aninterval to allowfirers to adopt thepatrol position.

1. Firer in thepatrol position withthe NVS and LA‘On’ and focusedat 100 metres.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. On the appear-ance of the targetthe firer is to fireone round fromthe patrol positionthen adopt theprone position andfire a further fourrounds at theexposure.4. Firers mustadopt the patrolposition betweenexposures.5. Target up andhold.


Unsupported

5rounds

1. 1 x Fig 12.2. 5 x 6 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion with the NVSand LA ‘On’ andfocused at 100metres.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fall whehit.

Scoring

LAAWA0309. All practices, one point per hit, sighters are not scored.

Standard

LAAWA0310. HPS — 25

Pass — 17 (70%).


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-61


200 mProne

3. Snap 5rounds


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion with the NVSand LA ‘On’ andfocused at 200metres.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one roundat each exposure.4. Targets fallwhen hit.


Supported

5rounds

1. 1 x Fig 11.2. 1 x 12 secondexposure.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion with the NVSand LA ‘On’ andfocused at 100metres.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire five roundsat the exposure.4. Targets up andhold.

FIRING WITH NVS AND LA ASSESSMENT —TIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-62

Practice Range/Target Timings RemarksUp Down05 26

1 100 mFigure 12

1. Reset watch and repeat once.2. Up and hold.

2 100 mFigure 12

Up Down05 1218 2529 3641 4851 58

Fall when hit.

3 200 mFigure 11

Up Down05 1419 2832 4145 541:01 1:10

Fall when hit.

4 200 mFigure 11

Up Down05 18

Up and hold.

AUTOMATIC FIRE — INSTRUCTIONAL SHOOT ON SAT/DCCT


AF0101. Aim. To practise by use of SAT/DCCT that the soldier can hold, aim andfire his weapon correctly when firing bursts.

AF0102. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using SAT/DCCT. If SAT/DCCTis not available the shoot may be carried out on an ETR, a range with a field firingtemplate applied or a field firing area.

AF0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete allpractices.

AF0104. Stores.


Normal range stores including:1 x Whistle1 x Stopwatch12 x wooden stakes1 x sledge hammer1 x roll mine tapeChalk (as required)1 x Double Figure 11 (stick-in) per firer120 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

AF0105. Miscellaneous.

a. Soldiers are to fire the SAT boresighting shoot prior to firing the practiceslisted below.

b. Prior to this lesson, soldiers are to be revised in the ‘Use of Bursts’ (seeInfantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 5, Rifle 5.56 mmModified L85A2, Light Support Weapon Modified L86A2 and AssociatedEquipments (Army Code No. 71753) or Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill atArms, Pamphlet No. 6, 5.56 mm Rifle and Light Support Weapon (Army CodeNo. 71374)).

c. It must be emphasised to firers that only one burst is to be fired per expo-sure in Practices 3, 6 and 7.

d. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggestedmethod is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with along blast.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-63

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-64

e. If the shoot is to be conducted on an ETR the targets are to be positioned50 metres forward of the main firing point. This will ensure that the electric tar-get mechanisms are not damaged.

f. If an ETR is not available an area of flat open ground of approximately 100m x 100 m within a field firing area is required. A suggested layout of the rangeis at page 7-32. In these circumstances, RCOs are to hold range qualificationsSA(A)(90) or SA(C)(90) in accordance with Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21).


Preliminaries

AF0106. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

AF0107. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary therange safety rules applicable to SAT/DCCT.

Practice Details

AF0108. Practice details are as follows:


1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Fire 15 roundsin bursts of 2–3rounds.3. Discuss thegroup, record thePOA.

1 25 mKneeling

Unsupported

15rounds

1. Double Figure11.2. No time limit.

2 25 mStanding

Unsupported

15rounds



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-65


3 25 mKneeling

Unsupported

15rounds

1. Double Figure11.2. 5 x 5 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to adoptthe nominatedposition and fireone burst of 2-3rounds at theexposure.4. After eachexposure order“Apply safetycatches, standup”.5. Record thescores.

4 50 mKneeling

Unsupported

15rounds



5 50 mStanding

Unsupported

15rounds



RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-66


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal forthe firer to adoptthe nominatedposition and fireone burst of 2-3rounds at eachexposure.4. After eachexposure order“Apply safetycatches, standup”.5. Record thescores.

6 50 mKneeling

Unsupported

15rounds


7 50 mStanding

Unsupportedand KneelingUnsupported

30rounds


1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The appear-ance of the targetis the signal for thefirer to fire oneburst of 2–3rounds from thestanding unsup-ported position,then adopt thekneeling unsup-ported position andfire a further burstof 2–3 rounds.4. After eachexposure order“Apply safetycatches, standup”.5. Record thescores.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-67

Scoring

AF0109. Practices 3, 6 and 7 — 1 point per hit.

Standards

AF0110. HPS — 60

Pass — 33


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-68

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-69

AUTOMATIC FIRE — ASSESSMENT


AF0201. Aim. To confirm that the soldier can hold, aim and fire his weapon cor-rectly when firing bursts.

AF0202. Conduct. The shoot may be conducted on an ETR, a range which hasa field firing template applied or a field firing area.

AF0203. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete allpractices.

AF0204. Stores.

Normal range stores including:1 x Whistle1 x Stopwatch12 x wooden stakes1 x sledge hammer1 x roll mine tapeChalk (as required)1 x Double Figure 11 (stick-in) per firer70 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

AF0205. Miscellaneous.

a. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggestedmethod is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with along blast.

b. It must be emphasised to firers that only one burst is to be fired per expo-sure in Practices 2 and 3.

c. If the shoot is to be conducted on an ETR the targets are to be positioned50 m forward of the main firing point. This will ensure that the electric targetmechanisms are not damaged.

d. If an ETR is not available an area of flat open ground of approximately 100m x 100 m within a field firing area is required. A suggested layout of therange is at Page 7-32. In these circumstances, conducting officers are to holdrange qualifications SA(A)(90) or SA(C)(90) in accordance with Reference A(Pamphlet No. 21).

e. A time chart to assist range staff is at page 7-31.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-70


Preliminaries

AF0206. Safety. Normal safety precautions.

AF0207. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary therange safety rules applicable.

Practice Details

AF0208. Details of the practices are as follows:



1 25 mKneeling

Unsupported

10rounds

1. Double Figure11 (stick-in).2. No time limit.

2 25 mStanding

Unsupported

15rounds

1. Double Figure11 (stick-in).2. 5 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

1. Firer in thenominated posi-tion.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. Fire one burstof 2–3 rounds ateach exposure.4. Record thescores.

3 50 mKneeling

Unsupported

15rounds

1. Double Figure11 (stick-in).2. 5 x 5 secondexposures withirregular intervals.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition.2. Order “Watchand Shoot”.3. The start of theexposure is thesignal for the firerto adopt the kneel-ing unsupported

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-71


position and fireone burst of 2–3rounds at eachexposure.4. Between expo-sures order“Adopt thestanding alertposition”.5. Record thescores.

3(cont)

4 45 m40 m35 m30 m25 m

StandingUnsupported

andKneeling

Unsupported

30rounds

1. Double Figure11 (stick-in).2. 1 x 12 secondexposures ateach range.

1. Firer in thestanding alertposition 50 m fromthe targets.2. Order “Watchand shoot,Advance”.3. Firers are toadvance in thestanding alertposition.4. The start of theexposure is thesignal for the firerto fire one burst of2–3 rounds fromthe standingunsupported posi-tion then adopt thekneeling unsup-ported positionand fire a furtherburst of 2–3rounds.5. After eachexposure order“Apply safetycatches, standup, advance”.6. Record thescores.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-72

Scoring

AF0209. Practices 2, 3 and 4 — 1 point per hit.

Standards

AF0210. HPS — 60

Pass — 36


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-73

AUTOMATIC FIRE ASSESSMENT —TIME CHART


Up and hold.1 No time limit25 mDouble Figure 11(stick-in)

2 25 mDouble Figure 11(stick-in)

UP DOWN05 0916 2025 2935 3943 47

1. Up and hold.2. Record the scores.

3 50 mDouble Figure 11(stick-in)

UP DOWN05 10

1. Up and hold.2. Reset watch andrepeat 4 times.3. Record the scores.

4 45 m,40 m,35 m,30 m,25 m,Double Figure 11(stick-in)

UP DOWN05 17

1. Up and hold.2. Reset watch andrepeat for each range.3. Record the scores.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-74

AUTOMATIC FIRE ASSESSMENT

SUGGESTED RANGE LAYOUT FOR FIELD FIRING AREA

Tgt * Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt

25 m**

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____**

30 m*** ***

35 m*** ***

40 m*** ***

45 m*** ***

50 m**

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____**

Notes:

* Targets are to be spaced at least 5 metres apart.

** White mine tape should be used to mark the main firing points at 25 m and 50 m.

*** Wooden stakes should be used to mark the intermediate firing points.

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (CI) — ETR

FTA0101. Ranges. This assessment is to be fired on an ETR only. An assess-ment for firing on a Gallery Range is at Page 10-43.

FTA0102. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is at Page 10-40.

FTA0103. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 50 minutes to complete thewhole assessment. It includes a two mile approach march. Details should start at 40minute intervals which will allow the range staff to return to the 600 m firing point andprepare for the next detail.

FTA0104. Organisation. The assessment is designed to test as many soldiersas possible in the organisation in which they fight. A maximum of two fire teams canfire simultaneously. Fire teams should be organised as follows:

a. Fire Team Comd (Rifle).

b. 2 x Riflemen, 3 for CIC.

c. 1 x LSW Marksman, not for CIC.

FTA0105. Aim. The aim of the assessment is to identify the Fire Team’s ability toput down effective fire whilst under physical stress, having completed an approachmarch typical of the kind that they may be required to perform on operations. It alsoacts as a transition from the standard shoots in LFMT to LFTT.

FTA0107. Rules.

a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the APWT before theassessment is fired.

b. The time for the two mile approach march should be determined by thecommanding officer and may be varied to cater for abnormal local terrain andweather conditions. As a guide timings should be 20 minutes for Infantry and22 minutes for OA&Svcs, using the equipment described below. All the fireteam members must complete the approach march together, but if the fire teamfails to make the time stipulated by the commanding officer it will be deemed tohave failed the assessment and should not shoot. Irrespective of the time takenby the fire team to complete the march, on arrival at the 600 m firing point theyare allowed two minutes to prepare themselves for the start of the shootingpractices. No extra time will be given for stoppages during the shoot.

c. Dress and equipment for this assessment is to be combat dress, belt orderwebbing (including filled magazines), combat body armour, combat helmets,(issued, serviceable hearing protection is to be worn on the range). Equipmentis to be packed in accordance with unit SOPs and should weigh 11.4 kg (25 lb)

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-75

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-76

for males and for females serving in Infantry TA battalions. Respirators andNBC gloves are to be worn for Practice 5.

d. Cross lane shooting is not permitted.

e. Coaching is not permitted, except for CIC.

f. Exposure times are to be taken from the time the target is up and steady.

FTA0107. Ammunition/Magazines. Riflemen are allocated 55 rounds, LSWmarksmen 65 rounds. Firers are allocated a number of extra rounds, Rifle 5 and LSW10. These are to enable firers to engage missed targets especially at longer ranges.Magazines are to be filled and used as required. Firers will not be allowed to improveon the HPS for any practice and points will not be gained for returning unfired rounds.

FTA0108. Scoring. Practices 1 and 2 — 3 points per hit.Practices 3 to 6 — 1 point per hit.

FTA0109. Standards. Whatever the size or organisation of the team, the Passstandard is 60% of the HPS.

a. Four man team (3 rifles and 1 LSW) HPS — 255 Pass — 153

b. Four man team (4 rifles) HPS — 240 Pass — 144

c. Three man team (2 rifles and 1 LSW) HPS — 195 Pass — 117

d. Three man team (3 rifles) HPS — 180 Pass — 108

FTA0110. Poor Shots. Individuals who shoot badly may be identified by use ofthe score card an example of which is at Page 10-42.

FTA0111. Explanatory Notes. The minimum words of command should be givenby the conducting officer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised bythe fire team commander and that all firers understand the practices they are to fire.

a. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure that:

(1) They have sufficient rounds loaded on their weapon.

(2) They apply their safety catches before moving between firing points.The conducting officer and safety supervisors are to ensure they carry outthe drills correctly.

b. It is the Fire Team Comd’s responsibility to decide which pair moves first,using bounds of about 35 m between firing points.

c. For Practices 4 and 6, LSW marksmen are to use their weapons in the riflerole (with bipod and butt strap folded).

d. If the team consists only of riflemen, it is to start the shoot at the 500 m fir-ing point.

FTA0112. Range Rigging.

a. The range is to be rigged as follows:

100 m — Figure 12c.200 m — Figure 12.300 m — Figure 11.

b. Wooden pegs should be used to mark the 35 m and 70 m positions betweenthe main firing points to assist with the control of fire teams during movementbetween ranges.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-77

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (CI) — ETR

Movement between Firing Points (Practices 1, 2 and 3)

1. The signal for the fire team to move will be the appearance of either the LSW orthe team’s targets for 1 second.

2. Movement between firing points will be by pairs in bounds of approximately 35m. The first pair to move will be decided by the Fire Team Comd.

3. The first bound for the first pair will be approximately 35 m. The second pair willthen move approximately 70 m. The first pair will then move onto the firing point fol-lowed by the second pair.

4. On each bound the firers are to take cover. Until they are in the prone positionthe other pair may not move. Once on the firing point the firers are to make ready.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-78

Practice/Position Range Target/Exposures Instructions

1. On arrival at the 600 m fir-ing point at the conclusion ofthe 2 mile approach march theteams are to cover off the tar-gets, in the prone position, asfollows:

a. Fire Team 1.(1) Comd and aRifleman — Tgts 1

& 2.(2) Rifleman — Tgt 3.(3) LSW — Tgt 4.

b. Fire Team 2.(1) LSW — Tgt 9.(2) Rifleman — Tgt 10.(3) Comd and aRifleman — Tgts

11 & 12.2. The Fire Teams arepermitted 2 minutes to get intoposition.

MOVE ONTOTHE START

LINE

600 m

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-79


1. Order “Load, Ready,Watch out”.2. The appearance of the LSWtargets for 1 second is the sig-nal for the Fire Team to moveto the 500 m firing point andmake ready (see Movementbetween Firing Points).3. 1 minute 05 seconds afterthe initial exposure there willbe 5 exposures. LSW marks-men must fire at each expo-sure.4. Targets fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 3 pointsper hit (HPS — 15 per marks-man).

PRACTICE 1

INITIALCONTACTFIRE AND

MANOEUVRE

Prone

500 m 1. LSW Targets —single Figure 11.2 1 x 1 secondexposure.3. 1 minute 05seconds later 5 x10 second expo-sures with 5 sec-ond intervals.

PRACTICE 2

FIRE ANDMANOEUVRE

Prone

400 m 1. All firers singleFigure 11.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure.3. 1 minute 05seconds later 5 x10 second expo-sures with 5 sec-ond intervals.

1. Order “Watch out”.2. The appearance of all tar-gets for 1 second is the signalfor the Fire Team to move tothe 400 m firing point (seeMovement between FiringPoints).3. 1 minute 05 seconds afterthe initial exposure there willbe 5 exposures. All firers mustfire at each exposure.4. Targets fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 3 pointsper hit (HPS — 15 per firer).

PRACTICE 3

WINNING THEFIRE FIGHT

Prone

200/300 m 1. All firers Figure12 at 200 m,Figure 11 at 300m.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure of theFigure 12 targets.3. 1 minute 05seconds later 1 x10 second expo-sure of the Figure12 at 200 m fol-

1. Order “Watch out”.2. The appearance of the tar-gets for 1 second is the signalfor the Fire Team to move tothe 300 m firing point (seeMovement between FiringPoints).3. 1 minute 05 seconds afterthe initial exposure there willbe 2 exposures. No more than5 hits will count on each target.4. Targets up and hold.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-80


5. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).

PRACTICE 3 (cont)

lowed 5 secondslater by 1 x 10 sec-ond exposure ofthe Figure 11 at300 m.

PRACTICE 4

CLEARINGTHE

POSITION

Standing,Kneeling orSquatting

Unsupported

100/200 m 1. All firers Figure12c at 100 m,Figure 12 at 200m.2. 5 x 4 secondexposures of theFigure 12c at 100m followed by 5 x4 second expo-sures of the Figure12 at 200 m with10 second intervalsbetween eachexposure.

1. Order “Standing alert,Watch and Shoot”.2. Firers must fire at eachexposure.3. Firers may either stand,kneel or squat. They mustreturn to the standing alertposition between exposures.4. Targets fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).

PRACTICE 5

THECOUNTER

ATTACK

Fire Trench

NBC

300/200/100 m

1. All firers Figure12c at 100 m,Figure 12 at 200m, Figure 11 at300 m.2. 15 x 4 secondexposures withirregular intervalsin the followingorder, 5 at 300 m,5 at 200 m, 5 at100 m.

1. Order “Move into the firetrench. Gas. Gas. Gas. Watchand Shoot”.2. Firers must fire at eachexposure.3. Targets fall when hit.4. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 15).5. At the end of the practiceorder the firers to apply safetycatches, remove respiratorsand gloves and move out ofthe fire trench.

PRACTICE 6

THE FOLLOWUP


Unsupported

50 to125 m

1. Figure 12c tar-get exposed at 25m and 50 m.2. Figure 12 targetexposed at 75 m,100 m and 125 m.3. At each dis-tance there are tobe 2 exposureseach of 4 seconds

1. Order “Standing alert,Watch and Shoot, Advance”.2. Firers are to advance in thealert position with safety catch-es applied.3. On the appearance of thefirst target of each engagementfirers are to adopt the selectedfire position and engage thetwo exposures. On completion,

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-81


order “Stand up, Advance”.(Movement as in paragraph 2above).4. Targets fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10).6. At the end of the practiceorder the fire team to unloadand inspect weapons.7. There is no movement for-ward of 125 m from the mainfiring point.

PRACTICE 6 (cont)

with 3 secondintervals.

Note: The dis-tances are the dis-tance the firer hasmoved from themain firing point.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-82

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (CI) — ETRTIME CHART


Practice TargetBank Lanes Timings Remarks

1

2

3

300

300

200

300

4 and 9

All

All

All

4 100

200

All

All

UP DOWN05 1020 2535 4050 55

1:05 1:10

1:20 1:251:35 1:401:50 1:552:05 2:102:20 2:25

a. Fall when hit

a. Fall when hit.

b. Take scores/Reset.d. Reset watch.

UP DOWN05 06

1:11 1:221:27 1:381:43 1:541:59 2:102:15 2:26

2:51 2:52

3:57 4:084:13 4:244:29 4:404:45 4:565:01 5:12

5:37 5:38

6:43 6:54

6:59 7:10

Signal only.

a. Fall when hit.b. Take scores/Reset.c. Put target switches1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12 tothe centre.

Signal only.

a. Fall when hit.

b. Take scores/Reset.

Signal only.

Up and hold.

a. Up and hold.

b. Take scores/Reset.c. Max 5 on each target.d. Reset watch.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-83

Notes:1. So that the target operator can use one master switch to control the target exposures, ini-tially the 300 metre switches should be set with lanes 4 and 9 in the centre position and theremainder set to down. Thereafter follow the instructions in the remarks column.2. A gap of 25 seconds has been allocated between Practices 1, 2 and 3 to allow the i/c con-sole to record scores and reset switches as necessary.3. The figure in the Target Bank column refers to the bank of targets as seen from the consolenot the range from which the firer is shooting.

Practice TargetBank Lanes Timings Remarks

5 300

200

100

All

All

All

UP DOWN05 1018 2329 3441 4650 55

1:05 1:101:17 1:221:27 1:321:38 1:431:47 1:52

2:02 2:072:13 2:182:22 2:272:32 2:372:40 2:45

a. Fall when hit.

b. Take scores/Reset.c. Reset watch.

6a

b

c

d

e

All UP DOWN00 0508 13

Repeat for eachrange.

100

100

200

200

200

a. Start each on signalfrom OI/C Range.

b. Fall when hit.

c. Take scores/Reset.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-84

Fig

1. —

Fire

Tea

m A

sses

smen

t (C

I) Sc

ore

Shee

t

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-85

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (CI) — GALLERY RANGE

FTA0201. Ranges. This assessment is to be fired on a Gallery Range only. Anassessment for firing on an ETR is at Page 10-33.


FTA0203. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 50 minutes to completethe whole assessment. It includes a two mile approach march. Details should startat 40 minute intervals which will allow the range staff to return to the 600 m firingpoint and prepare for the next detail.



b. 2 x Riflemen, 3 for CIC.

c. 1 x LSW Marksman, none for CIC.


FTA0207. Rules.


b. The time for the two mile approach march should be determined by thecommanding officer and may be varied to cater for abnormal local terrain andweather conditions. As a guide timings should be 20 minutes for Infantry and22 minutes for OA&Svcs, using the equipment described below. All the fireteam members must complete the approach march together, but if the fire teamfails to make the time stipulated by the commanding officer it will be deemedto have failed the assessment and should not shoot. Irrespective of the timetaken by the fire team to complete the march, on arrival at the 600 m firing pointthey are allowed two minutes to prepare themselves for the start of the shoot-ing practices. No extra time will be given for stoppages during the shoot.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-86

for males and for females serving in Infantry TA battalions. Respirators andNBC gloves are to be worn for Practice 5.


e. Coaching is not permitted, except for CIC.


FTA0207. Ammunition/Magazines. Riflemen are allocated 55 rounds, LSWmarksmen 65 rounds. Magazines are to be filled and used as required. Firers will notbe allowed to improve on the HPS for any practice and points will not be gained forreturning unfired rounds.

FTA0208. Scoring. Practices 1 and 2 — 3 points per hit.Practices 3 to 6 — 1 point per hit.


a. Four man team (3 rifles and 1 LSW) HPS — 255 Pass — 153

b. Four man team (4 rifles) HPS — 240 Pass — 144

c. Three man team (2 rifles and 1 LSW) HPS — 195 Pass — 117

d. Three man team (3 rifles) HPS — 180 Pass — 108

FTA0210. Poor Shots. Individuals who shoot badly may be identified by use ofthe score card an example of which is at Page 10-42.

FTA0211. Explanatory Notes. The minimum words of command should be givenby the conducting officer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised bythe fire team commander and that all firers understand the practices they are to fire.

a. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure that:

(1) They have sufficient rounds loaded on their weapon.

(2) They apply their safety catches before moving between firing points.The conducting officer and safety supervisors are to ensure they carry outthe drills correctly.

b. It is the Fire Team Comd’s responsibility to decide which pair moves first,using bounds of about 35 m between firing points.

c. For Practices 4 and 6, LSW marksmen are to use their weapons in the riflerole (with bipod and butt strap folded).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-87

d. If the team consists only of riflemen, it is to start the shoot at the 500 m fir-ing point.

FTA0212. Range Rigging.

a. The range is to be rigged as follows:

1 x Figure 11 — Frame Held.1 x Figure 12 — Hand Held.1 x Figure 12c — Hand Held.

Note: On gallery ranges a gap of at least one lane width is to be maintainedbetween fire teams.

b. Wooden pegs should be used to mark the 35 m and 70 m positions betweenthe main firing points to assist with the control of fire teams during movementbetween ranges.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-88

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (CI) — GALLERY RANGE

Movement between Firing Points (Practices 1, 2 and 3)

1. The signal for the fire team to move will be the appearance of either the LSW orthe team’s targets for 1 second.

2. Movement between firing points will be by pairs in bounds of approximately 35m. The first pair to move will be decided by the Fire Team Comd.

3. The first bound for the first pair will be approximately 35 m. The second pair willthen move approximately 70 m. The first pair will then move onto the firing point fol-lowed by the second pair.

4. On each bound the firers are to take cover. Until they are in the prone positionthe other pair may not move. Once on the firing point the firers are to make ready.


1. On arrival at the 600 m firingpoint at the conclusion of the 2mile approach march the teamsare to cover off the targets, inthe prone position, as follows:



b. Fire Team 2.(1) Comd and aRifleman — Tgts 6


2. Range conducting officersare to note that there is to be agap of at least a lane widthbetween fire teams.3. The Fire Teams arepermitted 2 minutes to get intoposition.

MOVE ONTOTHE START

LINE

600 m

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-89


1. Order “Load, Ready, Watchout”.2. The appearance of the LSWtargets for 1 second is the sig-nal for the Fire Team to moveto the 500 m firing point andmake ready (see Movementbetween Firing Points).3. 1 minute 05 seconds afterthe initial exposure there will be5 exposures. LSW marksmenmust fire at each exposure.4. Targets fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 3 pointsper hit (HPS — 15 per marks-man).

PRACTICE 1

INITIALCONTACTFIRE AND

MANOEUVRE

Prone

500 m 1. LSW Targets —single Figure 11.2 1 x 1 secondexposure.3. 1 minute 05seconds later 5 x10 second expo-sures with 5 sec-ond intervals.

PRACTICE 2

FIRE ANDMANOEUVRE

Prone

400 m 1. All firers singleFigure 11.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure.3. 1 minute 05seconds later 5 x10 second expo-sures with 10 sec-ond intervals.

1. Order “Watch out”.2. The appearance of all tar-gets for 1 second is the signalfor the Fire Team to move tothe 400 m firing point (seeMovement between FiringPoints).3. 1 minute 05 seconds afterthe initial exposure there will be5 exposures. Firers must fire ateach exposure.4. Targets fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 3 pointsper hit (HPS — 15 per firer).

1. All firers singleFigure 11.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure.3. 1 minute 05seconds later 1 x20 second expo-sure followed by 5x 4 second expo-sures with irregularintervals.

PRACTICE 3

WINNING THEFIRE FIGHT

Prone

300 m 1. Order “Watch out”.2. The appearance of the tar-gets for 1 second is the signalfor the Fire Team to move tothe 300 m firing point (seeMovement between FiringPoints).3. 1 minute 05 seconds afterthe initial exposure there will be1 x 20 second exposure fol-lowed by 5 x 4 second expo-sures. All firers must fire ateach exposure.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-90


4. No more than 10 hits willcount on the first exposurewhich will be up and hold, theremainder of the exposures willbe fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 15 per firer).

PRACTICE 3(cont)

PRACTICE 4

CLEARINGTHE

POSITION

Kneeling/Squatting

Unsupported

200 m 1. 1 x Figure 11and Figure 12 perfirer.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure of theFigure 11 targets.3. 30 secondslater 5 x 4 secondexposures of theFigure 11 followedby 5 x 4 secondexposures of theFigure 12 withirregular intervals.

1. Order “Watch out.”2. The appearance of theFigure 11 targets for 1 secondis the signal for the Fire Teamto run, as a team, to the 200 mfiring point and adopt theselected position.3. 30 seconds after the initialexposure there will be 5 xexposures of the Figure 11 fol-lowed by 5 x exposures of theFigure 12. All firers must fire ateach exposure.4. Targets fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).

1. 1 x Figure 11and Figure 12 perfirer.2. 5 x 4 secondexposures of theFigure 12 targetswith irregular inter-vals followed 10seconds later by 1x 10 second expo-sure of the Figure11 targets.

PRACTICE 5THE

COUNTERATTACK

Fire TrenchNBC

200 m 1. Order “Move into the firetrench. Gas. Gas. Gas. Watchand Shoot”.2. The Figure 12 targets will fallwhen hit. No more than 5 hitswill count on the Figure 11 tar-gets which will be up and hold.All firers are to fire at eachexposure.3. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).4. At the end of the practiceorder the firers to apply safetycatches, remove respiratorsand gloves and move out of thefire trench.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-91


PRACTICE 6

THE FOLLOWUP


Unsupported

100 m 1. 1 x Figure 12and Figure 12c perfirer.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure of theFigure 12 targets.3. 20 secondslater 1 x 10 secondexposure of theFigure 12 targetsfollowed by 5 x 3second exposuresof the Figure 12ctargets with irregu-lar intervals.

1. Order “Standing alert,Watch out, Advance.”.2. The Fire Team is to advancein the alert position with safetycatches applied.3. 30 m from the 100 m firingpoint the firers are to receive a1 second exposure of theFigure 12 targets, this is theirsignal to run to the 100 m firingpoint and adopt the selectedposition.4. 20 seconds after the initialexposure there will be 1 x 10second exposure of the Figure12 targets followed by 5 x 3second exposures of the Figure12c targets. All firers must fireat each exposure.6. No more than 5 hits willcount on the Figure 12 targetwhich will be up and hold, theremaining exposures will be fallwhen hit.7. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-92

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (CI) — GALLERY RANGETIME CHART

One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain Gallery ranges,this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.

Practice Timings Remarks

Signal only.

a. Fall when hit.

b. Record scores.c. Patch up.

1 UP DOWN05 07

1:12 1:231:28 1:391:44 1:552:00 2:112:16 2:27

2 UP DOWN05 07

1:12 1:231:33 1:441:54 2:052:15 2:262:36 2:47

Signal only.

a. Fall when hit.


3 UP DOWN05 07

1:12 1:33

1:43 1:481:56 2:012:07 2:122:19 2:242:29 2:34

Signal only.

Up and hold.

a. Fall when hit.


Target Lanes

SingleFigure 11

4 and 9

SingleFigure 11

All

SingleFigure 11

All

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-93

SingleFigure 12

SingleFigure

12c

SingleFigure 11

SingleFigure 12

SingleFigure 12

SingleFigure 11

UP DOWN05 07

37 4249 5459 1:04

1:10 1:151:19 1:24

1:34 1:391:46 1:511:55 2:002:05 2:102:13 2:18

Practice Target Lanes Timings Remarks

4 AllSignal only.

a. Fall when hit.


5 All UP DOWN05 1015 2024 2934 3942 47

57 1:08

Fall when hit.

a. Up and hold.b. Record scores.c. Patch up.

6 All UP DOWN00 02

22 33

43 4751 5558 1:02

1:06 1:101:13 1:17

Signal only.

Up and hold.

a. Fall when hit.


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-94

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-95

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (OA & SVCS) — ETR

FTA0301. Ranges. This assessment is to be fired on an ETR only. An assess-ment for firing on a Gallery Range is at Page 10-59.


FTA0303. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 35 minutes to complete thewhole assessment. This includes a two mile approach march. Details should start at30 minute intervals which will allow the range staff to return to the 350 m point andprepare for the next detail.



b. 2 x Riflemen.

c. 1 x LSW Firer.


FTA0307. Rules.




RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-96

for males and for females serving in Infantry TA battalions. Commanding offi-cers of OA&Svcs units may consider reducing the weight for females to 9 kg(20 lb). Respirators and NBC gloves are to be worn for Practice 2.


e. Coaching is not permitted.


FTA0307. Ammunition/Magazines. Firers are allocated 35 rounds. Magazinesare to be filled 1 x 25, 1 x 10.

FTA0308. Scoring. One point per hit.


a. 4 man fire team HPS — 140 Pass — 84.

b. 3 man fire team HPS — 105 Pass — 63.

FTA0310. Poor Shots. Individuals who shoot badly may be identified by use ofthe score card, an example of which is at Page 10-58.

FTA0311. Explanatory Notes.

a. The minimum words of command should be given by the conducting offi-cer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised by the fire team com-mander and that all firers understand the practices they are to fire.

b. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure that they have sufficient roundsloaded on their weapon.

c. For Practice 3, LSW firers are to use their weapons in the rifle role (withbipod and butt strap folded).

FTA0312. Range Rigging. The range is to be rigged as follows:

100m — Figure 12c.200m — Figure 12.300m — Figure 11.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-97

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (OA & SVCS) — ETRPractice/Position Range Target/Exposures Instructions

OCCUPATIONOF THE

POSITION

350 m 1. At the completion of the 2mile approach march the teamsare to be positioned tactically,50 m to the rear of their standto position (the 300 m firingpoint). The Fire Team is tocover off the targets as follows:




11 & 12.2. The Fire Teams are allowed2 minutes to get into position.

PRACTICE 1

THE FIREFIGHT

Fire Trench

200/300 m 1. All firers Figure12 at 200 m,Figure 11 at 300m.2. 30 secondsafter the command“Stand to” therewill be 1 x 10 sec-ond exposure ofthe Figure 12 followed 5 sec-onds later by 1 x10 second expo-sure of the Figure11.

1. Once the Team is in positionorder “Load, adopt the proneposition”.2. Order “Stand to”. The firersare to run to the 300 m firingpoint, move into the fire trenchand make ready.3. 30 seconds after the com-mand there will be 1 x 10 sec-ond exposure of the Figure 12followed 5 seconds later by 1 x10 second exposure of theFigure 11. All firers must fire ateach exposure.4. Targets up and hold.5. No more than 5 hits willcount on each target.6. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-98


PRACTICE 2

REPELLINGTHE ATTACK

Fire Trench

NBC

300/200/100 m

1. All firers Figure12c at 100 m,Figure 12 at 200m, Figure 11 at300 m.2. 15 x 5 secondexposures withirregular intervalsin the followingorder, 5 at 300 m,5 at 200 m, 5 at100 m.

1. Order “Gas. Gas. Gas.Watch and Shoot”.2. All firers must fire at eachexposure.3. Targets fall when hit.4. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 15 per firer).5. At the end of the practiceorder the firers to remove respi-rators and gloves, move out ofthe fire trench and adopt thestanding alert position.

PRACTICE 3

THE FOLLOWUP


Unsupported

50 to 175 m 1. Figure 12c tar-get exposed at 25m and 50 m.2. Figure 12 targetexposed at 75 m,100 m and 125 m.3. At each dis-tance there are tobe 2 exposureseach of 4 secondswith 3 secondintervals.

Note: The dis-tances are thedistance the firerhas moved fromthe main firingpoint.

1. Order “Standing alert,Watch and Shoot, Advance”.2. Firers are to advance in thealert position with safety catch-es applied.3. On the appearance of thefirst target of each engagementfirers are to adopt the selectedfire position and engage thetwo exposures. On completion,order “Stand up, Advance”.(Movement is as per paragraph2 above).4. Targets fall when hit.5. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).6. At the end of the practiceorder the Fire Team to unloadand inspect the weapons.7. There is no movement for-ward of 125 metres from themain firing point.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-99

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (OA & SVCS) — ETRTIME CHART


Practice Range Lanes Timings Remarks

1 200

300

All UP DOWN30 41

46 57

a. Up and hold.

b. Take scores/Reset.c. Max 5 on each target.d. Reset watch.

2 300

200

100

All UP DOWN05 1118 2429 3543 4955 1:01

1:06 1:121:18 1:241:28 1:341:41 1:471:52 1:58

2:03 2:092:14 2:202:23 2:292:35 2:412:45 2:51

a. Fall when hit.

b. Take scores/Reset.c. Reset watch.

3100

100

200

200

200

All UP DOWN00 0508 13

Repeat for eachrange.

a. Start each on signalfrom OIC Range.b. Fall when hit.

c. Take scores/Reset.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-100

Fig

2.—

Fire

Tea

m A

sses

smen

t (O

ther

Arm

s an

d Se

rvic

es) S

core

She

et

FIR

E T

EA

M A

SS

ES

SM

EN

T (O

THE

R A

RM

S A

ND

SE

RV

ICE

S) —

SC

OR

E S

HE

ET

Uni

t . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

.B

ty/S

qn/C

oy .

. . .

. . .

. . .

Tp/P

l . .

. . .

. . .

.D

et/S

ect

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

.

RA

NG

E O

FFIC

ER

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

.S

IGN

ATU

RE

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

.(B

LOC

K C

AP

ITA

LS)

TAS

KR

AN

KN

AM

ELA

NE

12

3TO

TAL

FIR

E T

EA

MP

RA

CTI

CE

S TOTA

L

C H A R L I E

PR

AC

TIC

ES TO

TAL

D E L T A

TAS

KR

AN

KN

AM

ELA

NE

12

3TO

TAL

FIR

E T

EA

M

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-101

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (OA & SVCS) — GALLERY RANGE

FTA0401. Ranges. This assessment is to be fired on a Gallery Range only. Anassessment for firing on an ETR is at Page 10-53.


FTA0403. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete thewhole assessment. It includes a two mile approach march. Details should start at 30minute intervals which will allow the range staff to return to the 350 m point and pre-pare for the next detail.



b. 2 x Riflemen.

c. 1 x LSW Firer.


FTA0407. Rules.




RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-102

for males and for females serving in Infantry TA battalions. Commanding offi-cers of OA&Svcs units may consider reducing the weight for females to 9 kg(20 lb). Respirators and NBC gloves are to be worn for Practice 2.


e. Coaching is not permitted.


FTA0407. Ammunition/Magazines. Firers are allocated 35 rounds. Magazinesare to be filled 1 x 25, 1 x 10.

FTA0408. Scoring. One point per hit.


a. 4 man fire team HPS — 140 Pass — 84.

b. 3 man fire team HPS — 105 Pass — 63.

FTA0410. Poor Shots. Individuals who shoot badly may be identified by use ofthe score card, an example of which is at Page 10-58.

FTA0411. Explanatory Notes.

a. The minimum words of command should be given by the conducting offi-cer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised by the fire team com-mander and that all firers understand the practices they are to fire.

b. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure that they have sufficient roundsloaded on their weapon.

c. For Practice 3, LSW firers are to use their weapons in the rifle role (withbipod and butt strap folded).

FTA0412. Range Rigging. The range is to be rigged as follows:

1 x Figure 11 — Frame Held.1 x Figure 12 — Hand Held.1 x Figure 12c — Hand Held.

Note: On gallery ranges a gap of at least one lane width is to be maintainedbetween fire teams.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-103

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (OA & SVCS) — GALLERY RANGEPractice/Position Range Target/Exposures Instructions

OCCUPATIONOF THE

POSITION

350 m 1. At the completion of the 2mile approach march the teamsare to be positioned tactically,50 m to the rear of their standto position (the 300 m firingpoint). The Fire Team is tocover off the targets as follows:




8 & 9.2. Range conducting officersare to note that there is to be agap of at least a lane widthbetween fire teams.3. The Teams are allowed 2minutes to get into position.

PRACTICE 1

THE FIREFIGHT

Fire Trench

300 m 1. Single Figure 11per firer.2. 30 secondsafter the command“Stand to” therewill be 2 x 10 sec-ond exposures witha 5 second inter-val.

1. Once the Team is in positionorder “Load, adopt the proneposition”.2. Order “Stand to”. The firersare to run to the 300 m firingpoint, move into the fire trenchand make ready.3. 30 seconds after the com-mand there will be 2 exposures.All firers must fire at each expo-sure.4. Targets up and hold.5. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-104


PRACTICE 2

REPELLINGTHE ATTACK

Fire Trench

NBC

200 m 1. 1 x Figure 12and Figure 12c perfirer.2. 5 x 5 secondexposures of theFigure 12c fol-lowed 5 secondslater by 1 x 20 sec-ond exposure ofthe Figure 12.

1. Order “Move into the firetrench. Gas. Gas. Gas. Watchand Shoot”.2. All firers must fire at eachexposure.3. The Figure 12c targets willfall when hit. No more than 10hits will count on the Figure 12which will be up and hold.4. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 15 per firer).5. At the end of the practiceorder the firers to remove respi-rators and gloves, move out ofthe fire trench and adopt thestanding alert position.

PRACTICE 3

THE FOLLOWUP


Unsupported

100 m 1. 1 x Figure 12and Figure 12c perfirer.2. 1 x 1 secondexposure of theFigure 12 targets.3. 20 secondslater 1 x 10 secondexposure of theFigure 12 targetsfollowed by 5 x 3second exposuresof the Figure 12ctargets with irregu-lar intervals.

1. Order “Watch out —Advance”.2. The Fire Team is to advancein the alert position with safetycatches applied.3. 30 m from the 100 m firingpoint the firers are to receive a1 second exposure of theFigure 12 targets. This is theirsignal to run to the 100 m firingpoint and adopt the selectedposition.4. 20 seconds after the initialexposure there will be 1 x 10second exposure of the Figure12 targets followed by 5 x 3second exposures of the Figure12c targets. All firers must fireat each exposure.5. No more than 5 hits willcount on the Figure 12 targetwhich will be up and hold, theremaining exposures will be fallwhen hit.6. Record the scores, 1 pointper hit (HPS — 10 per firer).

FIRE TEAM ASSESSMENT (OA & SVCS) — GALLERY RANGETIME CHART


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 10-105

Practice Timings Remarks


1 UP DOWN30 4146 57

2 UP DOWN05 1115 2127 3336 4246 52

57 1:18

Fall when hit.


3 UP DOWN00 02

22 33

43 4753 57

1:01 1:051:10 1:141:18 1:22

Signal only.

Up and hold.

a. Fall when hit.


Target Lanes

SingleFigure 11

All

SingleFigure 12c

SingleFigure 12

All

SingleFigure 12

SingleFigure 12c

All

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED10-106

Chapter 11

LIVE FIRING TACTICAL TRAINING(PERSONAL WEAPONS)

Scope

1101. Chapter 11 covers the final stageof Training the Battle Shot — Live FiringTactical Training (LFTT). This is the culmi-nation of Army Operational Shooting train-ing.

1102. LFTT is to be designed and con-ducted to ensure soldiers can meet the Operational Marksmanship Standards fortheir personal and alternate personal weapons in realistic, testing and demandingtactical conditions that match Operational Shooting Requirements.

1103. For regular Infantry battalions, LFTT is mandatory. While formation objec-tives may well permit LFTT to battle group level, by day and by night, certain mini-mum training objectives are to be achieved during Infantry Field Firing Camps(IFFC).

IFFC

1104. Training Progression. As a minimum requirement regular Infantry battal-ions are to undertake a progressive LFTT programme that ensures mastery of indi-vidual basic skills and collective battle drills from fire team to company level by dayand platoon level by night. At all levels, training is to vary in emphasis between offen-sive and defensive operations in line with training and operational priorities.Wherever possible LFTT is to integrate grenade throwing and firing of platoon andbattalion support weapons; but this will form part of the direction given by FormationCommanders, depending upon their annual priorities.

1105. Minimum Training Objectives. Infantry COs are to achieve the followingminimum training objectives during an IFFC, although the detailed syllabus toachieve these objectives, and its execution, remain the responsibility of COs.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 11-1

CONTENTS

SCOPE 11-1

IFFC 11-1

THE CHAIN OF COMMAND 11-2

SAFETY 11-3

Offensive

IBSR and/or Individual CQBPairs Fire and ManoeuvreTeam Fire and Manoeuvre

Section, Platoon and Company Attack by Day

1106. Ammunition. Ammunition for IFFCs is to be provided from theatre andcommand pools. A guide to the ammunition required by each soldier to carry out theminimum field firing training objectives is shown below and is based on the followingdata.

a. Rifle. Realistically, in an infantry battalion, no more than 300 riflemen willfire full IFFC (Three companies and reconnaissance platoon). It follows that300 x 600 = 180,000 rounds of 5.56mm ball carton, ball bandolier or 4B1T willbe required.

b. LSW. All 65 LSW marksmen in an infantry battalion will fire full IFFC.Therefore 65 x 1500 = 97,500 rounds of 4B1T will be required.

c. LMG. All 54 LMG gunners in an infantry battalion will fire full IFFC.Therefore 54 x 2150 = 116,100 rounds of 4B1T belted will be required.

1107. If battalions wish to fire in excess of 300 riflemen (ie including mortar/anti-tank platoons etc), then supporting justification will be required for additional ammu-nition. It is anticipated that commanders will wish to re-allocate available ammunitionto meet specific priorities at their own LFTT exercises. A guide for ammunition allo-cation is contained in the table at the end of this chapter.

1108. Evaluation. Evaluation of tactical fire effect will be important. Under direc-tion from Formation Commanders, an assessment of operational capability is to bemade.

1109. OPEVAL. COs are to report the achievements of IFFCs as part of unitOPEVAL returns. Any resource or administrative difficulties limiting the achievementof IFFCs are also to be recorded in a PXR and referred to the relevant formation HQand range organisation.

The Chain of Command

1110. Role of Formation Commanders. Formation Commanders have a keyresponsibility in directing and facilitating IFFCs in the following ways:

a. Establishing training and operational priorities for COs to ensure the rightdoctrinal emphases and the right balance of offensive and defensive LFTTexercises.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED11-2

Defensive

Section, Platoon and Company in Defence by DaySection and Platoon in Defence by Night

b. Ensuring COs have the resources to achieve the minimum mandatoryobjectives during IFFCs.

c. Resourcing COs to undertake battalion-level LFTT when and whereachievable and in line with overall priorities.

d. Directing COs to undertake IFFCs as part of overseas training exercises(OTX), when battalions are allocated such an exercise and otherwise would beunable to complete field firing within their annual training year.

e. Monitoring LFTT to ensure OPEVAL returns are completed and meet themandatory requirements of Army Operational Shooting.

1111. TA Infantry Battalions and Other Arms and Services. It is recognised forTA Infantry battalions that the opportunities for LFTT will be limited. Therefore whilstit cannot be a mandatory requirement for TA Infantry battalions to carry out an IFFC,where possible a four day IFFC(TA) should be conducted on all AnnualCamps/Concentrations where facilities exist and ammunition is available.Furthermore, LFTT is not mandatory for Other Arms and Services. Such units are toundertake LFTT as directed and resourced within the Chain of Command; and LFTTrecords are to be completed as part of unit OPEVAL returns. The LFTT should reflectthe unit’s operational role.

Safety

1112. Under no circumstances is a soldier to progress to LFTT unless the soldierhas achieved the required standards on the mandatory LFMT and TLFTT shoots(see Progression of Training Table in Chapter 1) in the previous 12 months, WHTshave been completed within the previous six months and the zero of his personalweapon has been checked

1113. All LFTT is to be planned and executed in strict accordance with ReferenceA (Pamphlet No. 21). Reference A gives sufficient scope to achieve the requiredresults. In particular, safety and supervision regulations are not to be compromisedin the pursuit of realism.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 11-3

A GUIDE TO THE AMMUNITION REQUIREMENTS FOR AN IFFC

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED11-4

Ball Ctn(per Rifle)

Ball/4B1T(per LSW)

Ball/4B1TBelted

(per LMG)

Offensive

IBSR and Individual CQB

Pairs Fire and Manoeuvre

Team Fire and Manoeuvre

Section Attack (Day)

Platoon Attack (Day)

Company Attack (Day)

Defensive

Section in Defence (Day and Night)

Platoon in Defence (Day and Night)

Company in Defence (Day )

TOTALS

– – –

40 60 50

60 60 100

60

120

120

120

–

20

30

20

600 1500 2150

180

180

330

330

–

120

120

120

200

200

600

400

–

200

200

200

Chapter 12

AMMUNITION SCALES(PERSONAL WEAPONS)

Scope

1201. This chapter sets out the ammuni-tion scales required in all Live Firing (LF)lessons for Personal Weapons containedin Volume 1 of the AOSP. The distributionis based on the scale for each individual byweapons for Live Firing MarksmanshipTraining (LFMT) up to and includingCollective Performance (CP) level 2, theAnnual Weapon Assessment (AWA) andthe LF Shoots for Operational ShootingSkills.

1202. The scales of ammunition alsoinclude those shoots that have been designed to be fired using either SAT or DCCTbut which can also be fired live in the absence of simulators.

Layout

1203. Each weapon has a series of tables indicating quantities of ammunition allo-cated for the various stages of LFMT for Training the Battle Shot.

1204. Ammunition for Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training (TLFTT) (Fire TeamAssessments and IBSR Shoots) and Live Firing Tactical Training (LFTT) is to be pro-vided from Theatre and command pools.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 12-1

CONTENTS

SCOPE 12-1

LAYOUT 12-1

RIFLE AMMUNITION TABLES 12-2

LSW AMMUNITION TABLES 12-5

LMG AMMUNITION TABLES 12-8

PISTOL AMMUNITION TABLES 12-10

OPERATIONAL SHOOTING SKILLS 12-12

SAFETY 12-13

Rifle Ammunition Tables

1205. Combat Infantryman Course (CIC). Listed in the following tables are thequantities of ammunition a trainee combat infantryman requires to complete oneattempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired in the CIC Rifle syllabususing SUSAT:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED12-2

Ser LF Lesson 5.56 mm Ball CtnQty Remarks

4 4 455 5 80

LFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire6 6 34 If SAT/DCCT not available7 7 348 8 429 9 55

10 10 4511 11 4912 12 5213 13 57

LFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)14 APWT

(CI)75

Total 668 Including APWT (CI)

123

123

204040

If SAT/DCCT not availableLFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing

If SAT/DCCT not available



1206. Combat Infantryman, Regular and TA Units — Annual Training. Listedin the following table are the quantities of ammunition a combat infantryman requiresto complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired annually:

1207. Other Arms and Services Phase 1 Training. Listed in the following tableare the quantities of ammunition a trainee requires to complete one attempt at eachof the LFMT lessons that are to be fired in the Other Arms and Services Phase 1Training syllabus:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 12-3


LMFT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)4 APWT

(CI)75

Grand Total 224 Including APWA (CI)

5 APWA(CI)

70Grand Total 229 Including APWT (CI)

LMFT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire123

101213

455257


LMFT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing

4 4 455 5 80

LFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire6 6 34 If SAT/DCCT not available7 7 348 8 42

1 1 2023

23

4040

If SAT/DCCT not availableIf SAT/DCCT not available

If SAT/DCCT not available9 9 55

1208. Other Arms and Services Personnel, Regular and TA Units — AnnualTraining. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition a soldier ofthe Other Arms and Services requires to complete one attempt at each of the LFMTlessons that are to be fired annually:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED12-4


LMFT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing1 4 45

LFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire2 6 34 If SAT/DCCT not available3 9 55


(OA&Svcs)55

Grand Total 189 Including APWT (OA&Svcs)5 APWA

(OA&Svcs)50

Grand Total 184 Including APWA (OA&Svcs)



(TS)55

Grand Total 445 Including APWT (OA&Svcs)

LSW Ammunition Tables

1209. Combat Infantryman Course (CIC). Listed in the following table are thequantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessonsthat are to be fired by all trainee combat infantrymen during the CIC LSW syllabus:

Note: 5.56 mm 4B1T may be substituted with 5.56 mm Ball Ctn during Tracer bans.

1210. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and TA Units — Initial Training. Listed inthe following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt ateach of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training by all combatinfantrymen whose personal weapon is the LSW:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 12-5

Ser LF Lesson 5.56 mm BallCtn Qty Remarks


LFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire4 4 — See Note5 6 —

1 1 3423

23

5028

5.56 mm 4B1TQty

———

5493 See Note

LFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)6 APWA

(CI)— 71 See Note

Grand Total 112 218 Including APWT (CI)

Ser LF Lesson Remarks


LFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire3 4 See Note4 5

1 22 3

5.56 mm 4B1TQty

——

5430 See Note

567

678

933692

See NoteSee NoteSee Note

5.56 mm BallCtn Qty

5028

—————


1211. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and TA Units — Annual Training. Listed inthe following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt ateach of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired annually by all combat infantrymen whosepersonal weapon is the LSW:


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED12-6



LFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire

1 22 3

5.56 mm 4B1TQty

——

34

5

78

3692

See NoteSee Note

LFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)APWT

(CI)116 See Note

5.56 mm BallCtn Qty


5028

——

—

Ser LF Lesson Remarks5.56 mm 4B1TQty

8LFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)

APWT(CI)

116 See Note

5.56 mm BallCtn Qty


—

1212. Other Arms and Services Personnel, Regular and TA Units — InitialTraining. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition required tocomplete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial train-ing by all Other Arms and Services personnel whose personal weapon is the LSW:


1213. Other Arms and Services Personnel, Regular and TA Units — AnnualTraining. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition required tocomplete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired annually by allOther Arms and Services personnel whose personal weapon is the LSW:


RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 12-7

Ser LF Lesson 5.56 mm BallCtn Qty Remarks


LFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire4 4 — See Note5 6 —

1 1 3423

23

5028

5.56 mm 4B1TQty

———

5493 See Note




1 22 3

5.56 mm 4B1TQty

——

5493 See Note

5.56 mm BallCtn Qty

5028

——


(OA&Svcs)— 73 See Note

Grand Total 112 220 Including APWT (OA&Svcs)


(OA&Svcs)— 73 See Note

78 220 Including APWT (OA&Svcs)Grand Total

LMG Ammunition Tables

1214. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and TA Units — Initial Training. Listed inthe following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt ateach of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training:

Note: 5.56 mm 4B1T may be substituted with 5.56 mm Ball Belted during Tracer bans.

1215. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and TA Units — Annual Training. Listed inthe following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt ateach of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired annually by all combat infantrymen whosepersonal weapon is the LMG:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED12-8




2 23 3

5.56 mm 4B1TBelted Qty

——

6065 See Note

67

67

11570

See NoteSee Note

5.56 mm BallBelted Qty

6030

————

1 1 30 —


(CI)— 130 See Note

Grand Total 120 440 Including APWT (CI)9 APWA

(CI)— 85

Grand Total 120 395 Including APWA (CI)



LFMT Stage 2 Elementary and Advanced Application of Fire2 5

5.56 mm 4B1TBelted Qty

65


—

1 3 30 —

See Note3 6 — 115 See Note4 7 — 70 See Note

Note: 5.56 mm 4B1T may be substituted with 5.56 mm Ball Belted during Tracer bans.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 12-9

Ser LF Lesson Remarks5.56 mm 4B1TBelted Qty



(CI)— 130 See Note

Grand Total 30 380 Including APWT (CI)6 APWA

(CI)— 85

Grand Total 30 335 Including APWA (CI)

Pistol Ammunition Tables

1216. Personal Weapon User — Initial Training. Listed in the following table arethe quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMTlessons that are to be fired during initial training by all Arms and Services personnelwhose personal weapon is the pistol:

1217. Personal Weapon User — Annual Training. Listed in the following table arethe quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMTlessons that are to be fired during annual training by all Arms and Services personnelwhose personal weapon is the pistol:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED12-10

Ser LF Lesson 9 mm Ball CtnQty Remarks


LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire4 4 365 5 32

LFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)6 APWT 32

Grand Total 175 Including APWT

1 1 2023

23

2530




LFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)5 APWT 32

Grand Total 155 Including APWT

1 2 252 3 30

1218. Alternative Personal Weapon User — Initial Training. Listed in the follow-ing table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each ofthe LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training by all Arms and Services per-sonnel whose alternative personal weapon is the pistol:

1219. Alternative Personal Weapon User — Annual Training. Listed in the fol-lowing table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at eachof the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during annual training by all Arms and Servicespersonnel whose alternative personal weapon is the pistol:

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 12-11




LFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)5 APWA 24

Grand Total 142 Including APWA

1 1 202 3 30




LFMT Stage 3 Annual Weapon Assessment (AWA)4 APWA 24

Grand Total 122 Including APWA

1 3 30

1220. Operational Shooting Skills.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED12-12


4 Automatic Fire — Assessment

5 Firing in NBC Conditions —Rifle/LSW Instruction andAssessment

2 Firing at Moving Targets —Assessment

3 Automatic Fire — Instruction

9 mmBallQty

—

—

6

7

Firing in NBC Conditions —Pistol AssessmentFiring in NBC Conditions —LMG Instruction andAssessment

18

5.56 mmBall Ctn

Qty

72

120

70

35

1 Firing at Moving Targets —Instruction

120

8 Firing at the LNV — Rifle/LSWInstruction and Assessment

30

9 Firing at the LNV — LMGInstruction and Assessment

5.56 mm4B1T/Ball Belted

QtyIf SAT/DCCT notavailable

If SAT/DCCT notavailable

150

90

10 Firing with CWS —Rifle/LSW Zeroing/Registration

(Primary User)25

(SecondaryUser)

1011 Firing with CWS —

Rifle/LSW Assessment(Primary User)

40(Secondary

User)30

12 Firing with CWS —LMG Zeroing/Registration

25

13 Firing with CWS —LMG Assessment

65

14 Firing with NVS and LA —Introductory Shoot (25 metres)

20

15 Firing with NVS and LA —Grouping and Zeroing

50

16 Firing with NVS and LA —Assessment

35

Safety

1221. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed a safety test prior to their firstlive firing of any weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conductingofficers must confirm that all soldiers firing any weapon for the first time have com-pleted the relevant WHTs prior to firing.

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED 12-13

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED12-14

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED

RESTRICTED

Documents

Army Operation Shooting Policy (AOSP) Vol 1